5fe06e64bb3ac27ae431b5046f750b27d36c5c86
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
403 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
404 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
405 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
406 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
407 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
408 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
409 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
410 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
411 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
412 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
413 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
414 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
415 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
416 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
417 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
418 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
419 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
420 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
421 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
422 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
423 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
424 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
425 @end ifset
426 @ifset MMIX
427
428 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
429 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
430 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
431 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
432 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
433 @end ifset
434 @ifset NIOSII
435
436 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
437 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
438 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
439 @end ifset
440 @ifset PDP11
441
442 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
443 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
444 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
445 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
446 @end ifset
447 @ifset PJ
448
449 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
450 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
451 @end ifset
452 @ifset PPC
453
454 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
455 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
456 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
457 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
458 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
459 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
460 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
461 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
462 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
463 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
464 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
465 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
466 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset RX
469
470 @emph{Target RX options:}
471 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
472 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
473 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
474 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
475 [@b{-mpid}]
476 [@b{-mrelax}]
477 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
478 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
479 @end ifset
480 @ifset S390
481
482 @emph{Target s390 options:}
483 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
484 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
485 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
486 @end ifset
487 @ifset SCORE
488
489 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
490 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
491 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
492 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
493 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
494 @end ifset
495 @ifset SPARC
496
497 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
498 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
499 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
500 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
501 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
502 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
503 @end ifset
504 @ifset TIC54X
505
506 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
507 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
508 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
509 @end ifset
510
511 @ifset TIC6X
512
513 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
514 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
515 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
516 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
517 @end ifset
518 @ifset TILEGX
519
520 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
521 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
522 @end ifset
523 @ifset TILEPRO
524 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
525 @end ifset
526
527 @ifset XTENSA
528
529 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
530 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
531 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
532 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
533 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
534 @end ifset
535
536 @ifset Z80
537
538 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
539 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
540 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
541 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
542 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
543 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
544 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
545 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
546 @end ifset
547
548 @ifset Z8000
549 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
550 @end ifset
551
552 @c man end
553 @end smallexample
554
555 @c man begin OPTIONS
556
557 @table @gcctabopt
558 @include at-file.texi
559
560 @item -a[cdghlmns]
561 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
562
563 @table @gcctabopt
564 @item -ac
565 omit false conditionals
566
567 @item -ad
568 omit debugging directives
569
570 @item -ag
571 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
572
573 @item -ah
574 include high-level source
575
576 @item -al
577 include assembly
578
579 @item -am
580 include macro expansions
581
582 @item -an
583 omit forms processing
584
585 @item -as
586 include symbols
587
588 @item =file
589 set the name of the listing file
590 @end table
591
592 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
593 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
594 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
595
596 @item --alternate
597 Begin in alternate macro mode.
598 @ifclear man
599 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
600 @end ifclear
601
602 @item --compress-debug-sections
603 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
604 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
605 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
606
607 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
608 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
609
610 @item -D
611 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
612 other assemblers.
613
614 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
615 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
616 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
617
618 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
619 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
620 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
621 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
622 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
623 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
624
625 @item -f
626 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
627 compiler output).
628
629 @item -g
630 @itemx --gen-debug
631 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
632 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
633 ECOFF or DWARF2.
634
635 @item --gstabs
636 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
637 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
638
639 @item --gstabs+
640 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
641 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
642 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
643 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
644 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
645
646 @item --gdwarf-2
647 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
648 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
649 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
650
651 @item --gdwarf-sections
652 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
653 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
654 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
655 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
656 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
657 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
658 suffix.
659
660 @item --size-check=error
661 @itemx --size-check=warning
662 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
663
664 @item --help
665 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
666
667 @item --target-help
668 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
669
670 @item -I @var{dir}
671 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
672
673 @item -J
674 Don't warn about signed overflow.
675
676 @item -K
677 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
678 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
679 @end ifclear
680 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
681 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
682 @end ifset
683
684 @item -L
685 @itemx --keep-locals
686 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
687 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
688 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
689 @ifclear man
690 @xref{Symbol Names}.
691 @end ifclear
692
693 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
694 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
695 listing to @var{number}.
696
697 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
698 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
699 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
700
701 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
702 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
703 @var{number} bytes.
704
705 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
706 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
707 to @var{number} + 1.
708
709 @item -o @var{objfile}
710 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
711
712 @item -R
713 Fold the data section into the text section.
714
715 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
716 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
717 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
718 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
719 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
720 requirements at the expense of speed.
721
722 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
723 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
724 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
725 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
726
727 @item --statistics
728 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
729 assembly.
730
731 @item --strip-local-absolute
732 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
733
734 @item -v
735 @itemx -version
736 Print the @command{as} version.
737
738 @item --version
739 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
740
741 @item -W
742 @itemx --no-warn
743 Suppress warning messages.
744
745 @item --fatal-warnings
746 Treat warnings as errors.
747
748 @item --warn
749 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
750
751 @item -w
752 Ignored.
753
754 @item -x
755 Ignored.
756
757 @item -Z
758 Generate an object file even after errors.
759
760 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
761 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
762
763 @end table
764 @c man end
765
766 @ifset AARCH64
767
768 @ifclear man
769 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
770 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
771 @end ifclear
772
773 @ifset man
774 @c man begin OPTIONS
775 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
776 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
777 @c man end
778 @c man begin INCLUDE
779 @include c-aarch64.texi
780 @c ended inside the included file
781 @end ifset
782
783 @end ifset
784
785 @ifset ALPHA
786
787 @ifclear man
788 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
789 for an Alpha processor.
790 @end ifclear
791
792 @ifset man
793 @c man begin OPTIONS
794 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
795 processor.
796 @c man end
797 @c man begin INCLUDE
798 @include c-alpha.texi
799 @c ended inside the included file
800 @end ifset
801
802 @end ifset
803
804 @c man begin OPTIONS
805 @ifset ARC
806 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
807 an ARC processor.
808
809 @table @gcctabopt
810 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
811 This option selects the core processor variant.
812 @item -EB | -EL
813 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
814 @end table
815 @end ifset
816
817 @ifset ARM
818 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
819 processor family.
820
821 @table @gcctabopt
822 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
823 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
824 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
825 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
826 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
827 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
828 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
829 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
830 @item -mthumb
831 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
832 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
833 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
834 @item -EB | -EL
835 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
836 @item -mthumb-interwork
837 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
838 ARM code in mind.
839 @item -k
840 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
841 @end table
842 @end ifset
843 @c man end
844
845 @ifset Blackfin
846
847 @ifclear man
848 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
849 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
850 @end ifclear
851
852 @ifset man
853 @c man begin OPTIONS
854 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
855 the Blackfin processor family.
856 @c man end
857 @c man begin INCLUDE
858 @include c-bfin.texi
859 @c ended inside the included file
860 @end ifset
861
862 @end ifset
863
864 @c man begin OPTIONS
865 @ifset CRIS
866 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
867 @end ifset
868
869 @ifset D10V
870 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
871 a D10V processor.
872 @table @gcctabopt
873 @cindex D10V optimization
874 @cindex optimization, D10V
875 @item -O
876 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
877 @end table
878 @end ifset
879
880 @ifset D30V
881 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
882 processor.
883 @table @gcctabopt
884 @cindex D30V optimization
885 @cindex optimization, D30V
886 @item -O
887 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
888
889 @cindex D30V nops
890 @item -n
891 Warn when nops are generated.
892
893 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
894 @item -N
895 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
896 @end table
897 @end ifset
898 @c man end
899
900 @ifset EPIPHANY
901 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
902 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
903
904 @ifclear man
905 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
906 configured for an Epiphany processor.
907 @end ifclear
908
909 @ifset man
910 @c man begin OPTIONS
911 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
912 an Epiphany processor.
913 @c man end
914 @c man begin INCLUDE
915 @include c-epiphany.texi
916 @c ended inside the included file
917 @end ifset
918
919 @end ifset
920
921 @ifset H8300
922
923 @ifclear man
924 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
925 for an H8/300 processor.
926 @end ifclear
927
928 @ifset man
929 @c man begin OPTIONS
930 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
931 processor.
932 @c man end
933 @c man begin INCLUDE
934 @include c-h8300.texi
935 @c ended inside the included file
936 @end ifset
937
938 @end ifset
939
940 @ifset I80386
941
942 @ifclear man
943 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
944 configured for an i386 processor.
945 @end ifclear
946
947 @ifset man
948 @c man begin OPTIONS
949 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
950 an i386 processor.
951 @c man end
952 @c man begin INCLUDE
953 @include c-i386.texi
954 @c ended inside the included file
955 @end ifset
956
957 @end ifset
958
959 @c man begin OPTIONS
960 @ifset I960
961 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
962 Intel 80960 processor.
963
964 @table @gcctabopt
965 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
966 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
967
968 @item -b
969 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
970
971 @item -no-relax
972 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
973 error if necessary.
974
975 @end table
976 @end ifset
977
978 @ifset IP2K
979 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
980 Ubicom IP2K series.
981
982 @table @gcctabopt
983
984 @item -mip2022ext
985 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
986
987 @item -mip2022
988 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
989 just the basic IP2022 ones.
990
991 @end table
992 @end ifset
993
994 @ifset M32C
995 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
996 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
997
998 @table @gcctabopt
999
1000 @item -m32c
1001 Assemble M32C instructions.
1002
1003 @item -m16c
1004 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1005
1006 @item -relax
1007 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1008
1009 @item -h-tick-hex
1010 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1011
1012 @end table
1013 @end ifset
1014
1015 @ifset M32R
1016 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1017 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1018
1019 @table @gcctabopt
1020
1021 @item --m32rx
1022 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1023 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1024
1025 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1026 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1027 encountered.
1028
1029 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1030 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1031 encountered.
1032
1033 @end table
1034 @end ifset
1035
1036 @ifset M680X0
1037 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1038 Motorola 68000 series.
1039
1040 @table @gcctabopt
1041
1042 @item -l
1043 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1044
1045 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1046 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1047 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1048 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1049 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1050
1051 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1052 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1053 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1054 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1055 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1056 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1057
1058 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1059 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1060 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1061
1062 @end table
1063 @end ifset
1064
1065 @ifset NIOSII
1066
1067 @ifclear man
1068 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1069 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1070 @end ifclear
1071
1072 @ifset man
1073 @c man begin OPTIONS
1074 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1075 Altera Nios II processor.
1076 @c man end
1077 @c man begin INCLUDE
1078 @include c-nios2.texi
1079 @c ended inside the included file
1080 @end ifset
1081 @end ifset
1082
1083 @ifset PDP11
1084
1085 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1086 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1087
1088 @table @gcctabopt
1089 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1090 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1091 default is @option{-mpic}.
1092
1093 @item -mall
1094 @itemx -mall-extensions
1095 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1096
1097 @item -mno-extensions
1098 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1099
1100 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1101 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1102
1103 @item -m@var{cpu}
1104 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1105 disable all other extensions.
1106
1107 @item -m@var{machine}
1108 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1109 model, and disable all other extensions.
1110 @end table
1111
1112 @end ifset
1113
1114 @ifset PJ
1115 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1116 a picoJava processor.
1117
1118 @table @gcctabopt
1119
1120 @cindex PJ endianness
1121 @cindex endianness, PJ
1122 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1123 @item -mb
1124 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1125
1126 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1127 @item -ml
1128 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1129
1130 @end table
1131 @end ifset
1132
1133 @ifset M68HC11
1134 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1135 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1136
1137 @table @gcctabopt
1138
1139 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1140 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1141 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1142
1143 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1144 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1145 XGATE address space.
1146
1147 @item -mshort
1148 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1149
1150 @item -mlong
1151 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1152
1153 @item -mshort-double
1154 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1155
1156 @item -mlong-double
1157 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1158
1159 @item --force-long-branches
1160 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1161 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1162 sub routine.
1163
1164 @item -S | --short-branches
1165 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1166 when the offset is out of range.
1167
1168 @item --strict-direct-mode
1169 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1170 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1171
1172 @item --print-insn-syntax
1173 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1174
1175 @item --print-opcodes
1176 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1177
1178 @item --generate-example
1179 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1180 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1181
1182 @end table
1183 @end ifset
1184
1185 @ifset SPARC
1186 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1187 for the SPARC architecture:
1188
1189 @table @gcctabopt
1190 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1191 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1192 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1193
1194 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1195 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1196
1197 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1198 UltraSPARC extensions.
1199
1200 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1201 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1202 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1203
1204 @item -bump
1205 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1206 @end table
1207 @end ifset
1208
1209 @ifset TIC54X
1210 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1211 architecture.
1212
1213 @table @gcctabopt
1214 @item -mfar-mode
1215 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1216 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1217 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1218 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1219 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1220 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1221 behaviour in the shell.
1222 @end table
1223 @end ifset
1224
1225 @ifset MIPS
1226 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1227 a MIPS processor.
1228
1229 @table @gcctabopt
1230 @item -G @var{num}
1231 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1232 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1233 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1234
1235 @cindex MIPS endianness
1236 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1237 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1238 @item -EB
1239 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1240
1241 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1242 @item -EL
1243 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1244
1245 @cindex MIPS ISA
1246 @item -mips1
1247 @itemx -mips2
1248 @itemx -mips3
1249 @itemx -mips4
1250 @itemx -mips5
1251 @itemx -mips32
1252 @itemx -mips32r2
1253 @itemx -mips64
1254 @itemx -mips64r2
1255 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1256 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1257 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1258 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1259 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1260 @samp{-mips64r2} correspond to generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2,
1261 MIPS64, and MIPS64 Release 2 ISA processors, respectively.
1262
1263 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1264 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1265
1266 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1267 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1268
1269 @item -mfix7000
1270 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1271 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1272 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1273
1274 @item -mfix-rm7000
1275 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1276 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1277 followed by a load instruction.
1278
1279 @item -mdebug
1280 @itemx -no-mdebug
1281 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1282 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1283
1284 @item -mpdr
1285 @itemx -mno-pdr
1286 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1287
1288 @item -mgp32
1289 @itemx -mfp32
1290 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1291 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1292 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1293 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1294
1295 @item -mips16
1296 @itemx -no-mips16
1297 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1298 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1299 turns off this option.
1300
1301 @item -mmicromips
1302 @itemx -mno-micromips
1303 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1304 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1305 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1306 at the start of the assembly file.
1307
1308 @item -msmartmips
1309 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1310 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1311 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1312 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1313
1314 @item -mips3d
1315 @itemx -no-mips3d
1316 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1317 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1318 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1319
1320 @item -mdmx
1321 @itemx -no-mdmx
1322 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1323 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1324 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1325
1326 @item -mdsp
1327 @itemx -mno-dsp
1328 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1329 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1330 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1331
1332 @item -mdspr2
1333 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1334 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1335 This option implies -mdsp.
1336 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1337 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1338
1339 @item -mmsa
1340 @itemx -mno-msa
1341 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1342 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1343 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1344
1345 @item -mmt
1346 @itemx -mno-mt
1347 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1348 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1349 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1350
1351 @item -mmcu
1352 @itemx -mno-mcu
1353 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1354 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1355 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1356
1357 @item -minsn32
1358 @itemx -mno-insn32
1359 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1360 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1361 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1362 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1363 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1364 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1365 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1366
1367 @item --construct-floats
1368 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1369 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1370 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1371 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1372 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1373 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1374
1375 @item --relax-branch
1376 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1377 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1378 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1379 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1380
1381 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1382 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1383 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1384
1385 @cindex emulation
1386 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1387 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1388 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1389 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1390 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1391
1392 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1393 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1394 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1395 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1396 preferred options instead.
1397
1398 @item -nocpp
1399 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1400 the native tools.
1401
1402 @item --trap
1403 @itemx --no-trap
1404 @itemx --break
1405 @itemx --no-break
1406 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1407 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1408 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1409 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1410 break exception.
1411
1412 @item -n
1413 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1414 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1415 @end table
1416 @end ifset
1417
1418 @ifset MCORE
1419 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1420 an MCore processor.
1421
1422 @table @gcctabopt
1423 @item -jsri2bsr
1424 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1425 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1426 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1427
1428 @item -sifilter
1429 @itemx -nosifilter
1430 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1431 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1432
1433 @item -relax
1434 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1435
1436 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1437 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1438 can be assembled.
1439
1440 @item -EB
1441 Assemble for a big endian target.
1442
1443 @item -EL
1444 Assemble for a little endian target.
1445
1446 @end table
1447 @end ifset
1448 @c man end
1449
1450 @ifset METAG
1451
1452 @ifclear man
1453 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1454 for a Meta processor.
1455 @end ifclear
1456
1457 @ifset man
1458 @c man begin OPTIONS
1459 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1460 Meta processor.
1461 @c man end
1462 @c man begin INCLUDE
1463 @include c-metag.texi
1464 @c ended inside the included file
1465 @end ifset
1466
1467 @end ifset
1468
1469 @c man begin OPTIONS
1470 @ifset MMIX
1471 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1472 @end ifset
1473
1474 @c man end
1475 @ifset PPC
1476
1477 @ifclear man
1478 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1479 for a PowerPC processor.
1480 @end ifclear
1481
1482 @ifset man
1483 @c man begin OPTIONS
1484 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1485 PowerPC processor.
1486 @c man end
1487 @c man begin INCLUDE
1488 @include c-ppc.texi
1489 @c ended inside the included file
1490 @end ifset
1491
1492 @end ifset
1493
1494 @c man begin OPTIONS
1495 @ifset RX
1496 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1497 @end ifset
1498
1499 @ifset S390
1500 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1501 processor family.
1502
1503 @table @gcctabopt
1504 @item -m31
1505 @itemx -m64
1506 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1507 @item -mesa
1508 @item -mzarch
1509 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1510 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1511 @item -march=@var{processor}
1512 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1513 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1514 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1515 @item -mregnames
1516 @itemx -mno-regnames
1517 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1518 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1519 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1520 but evaluates to zero.
1521 @end table
1522 @end ifset
1523 @c man end
1524
1525 @ifset TIC6X
1526
1527 @ifclear man
1528 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1529 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1530 @end ifclear
1531
1532 @ifset man
1533 @c man begin OPTIONS
1534 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1535 TMS320C6000 processor.
1536 @c man end
1537 @c man begin INCLUDE
1538 @include c-tic6x.texi
1539 @c ended inside the included file
1540 @end ifset
1541
1542 @end ifset
1543
1544 @ifset TILEGX
1545
1546 @ifclear man
1547 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1548 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1549 @end ifclear
1550
1551 @ifset man
1552 @c man begin OPTIONS
1553 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1554 processor.
1555 @c man end
1556 @c man begin INCLUDE
1557 @include c-tilegx.texi
1558 @c ended inside the included file
1559 @end ifset
1560
1561 @end ifset
1562
1563 @ifset XTENSA
1564
1565 @ifclear man
1566 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1567 for an Xtensa processor.
1568 @end ifclear
1569
1570 @ifset man
1571 @c man begin OPTIONS
1572 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1573 Xtensa processor.
1574 @c man end
1575 @c man begin INCLUDE
1576 @include c-xtensa.texi
1577 @c ended inside the included file
1578 @end ifset
1579
1580 @end ifset
1581
1582 @c man begin OPTIONS
1583
1584 @ifset Z80
1585 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1586 a Z80 family processor.
1587 @table @gcctabopt
1588 @item -z80
1589 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1590 @item -r800
1591 Assemble for R800 processor.
1592 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1593 @itemx -Wnud
1594 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1595 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1596 @itemx -Wnup
1597 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1598 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1599 @itemx -Wud
1600 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1601 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1602 @itemx -Wup
1603 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1604 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1605 @itemx -Fud
1606 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1607 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1608 @itemx -Fup
1609 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1610 @end table
1611 @end ifset
1612
1613 @c man end
1614
1615 @menu
1616 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1617 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1618 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1619 * Command Line:: Command Line
1620 * Input Files:: Input Files
1621 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1622 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1623 @end menu
1624
1625 @node Manual
1626 @section Structure of this Manual
1627
1628 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1629 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1630 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1631 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1632 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1633
1634 @ifclear GENERIC
1635 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1636 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1637 @end ifclear
1638 @ifset GENERIC
1639 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1640 various flavors of the assembler.
1641 @end ifset
1642
1643 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1644 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1645 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1646 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1647 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1648 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1649 particular architecture.
1650 @ifset GENERIC
1651 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1652 machine architecture manual for this information.
1653 @end ifset
1654 @ifclear GENERIC
1655 @ifset H8/300
1656 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1657 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1658 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1659 @end ifset
1660 @ifset SH
1661 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1662 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1663 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1664 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1665 @end ifset
1666 @ifset Z8000
1667 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1668 @end ifset
1669 @end ifclear
1670
1671 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1672 @ignore
1673 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1674 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1675 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1676 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1677 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1678 qualification.
1679
1680 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1681 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1682 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1683 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1684 @end ignore
1685
1686 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1687 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1688 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1689 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1690 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1691 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1692 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1693 @c directives).
1694
1695 @node GNU Assembler
1696 @section The GNU Assembler
1697
1698 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1699
1700 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1701 @ifclear GENERIC
1702 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1703 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1704 @end ifclear
1705 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1706 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1707 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1708 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1709 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1710
1711 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1712 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1713 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1714 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1715 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1716 machine would assemble.
1717 @ifset VAX
1718 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1719 @end ifset
1720 @ifset M680X0
1721 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1722 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1723 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1724 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1725 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1726 @end ifset
1727
1728 @c man end
1729
1730 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1731 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1732 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1733
1734 @node Object Formats
1735 @section Object File Formats
1736
1737 @cindex object file format
1738 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1739 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1740 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1741 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1742 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1743 @ifclear GENERIC
1744 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1745 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1746 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1747 @end ifclear
1748 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1749 @ifset I960
1750 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1751 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1752 @end ifset
1753 @ifset HPPA
1754 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1755 SOM or ELF format object files.
1756 @end ifset
1757 @end ifclear
1758
1759 @node Command Line
1760 @section Command Line
1761
1762 @cindex command line conventions
1763
1764 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1765 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1766 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1767 significant.
1768
1769 @cindex standard input, as input file
1770 @kindex --
1771 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1772 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1773
1774 @cindex options, command line
1775 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1776 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1777 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1778 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1779 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1780
1781 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1782 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1783 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1784 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1785
1786 @smallexample
1787 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1788 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1789 @end smallexample
1790
1791 @node Input Files
1792 @section Input Files
1793
1794 @cindex input
1795 @cindex source program
1796 @cindex files, input
1797 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1798 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1799 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1800 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1801
1802 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1803 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1804 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1805 order specified.
1806
1807 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1808 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1809 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1810 (The standard input is also a file.)
1811
1812 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1813 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1814 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1815 is taken to be an input file name.
1816
1817 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1818 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1819 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1820 to assemble.
1821
1822 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1823 in your command line.
1824
1825 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1826 file.
1827
1828 @c man end
1829
1830 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1831
1832 @cindex input file linenumbers
1833 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1834 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1835 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1836 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1837 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1838
1839 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1840 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1841
1842 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1843 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1844 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1845 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1846 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1847 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1848
1849 @node Object
1850 @section Output (Object) File
1851
1852 @cindex object file
1853 @cindex output file
1854 @kindex a.out
1855 @kindex .o
1856 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1857 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1858 is the object file. Its default name is
1859 @ifclear BOUT
1860 @code{a.out}.
1861 @end ifclear
1862 @ifset BOUT
1863 @ifset GENERIC
1864 @code{a.out}, or
1865 @end ifset
1866 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1867 @end ifset
1868 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1869 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1870 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1871 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1872 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1873
1874 @cindex linker
1875 @kindex ld
1876 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1877 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1878 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1879 information for the debugger.
1880
1881 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1882 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1883
1884 @node Errors
1885 @section Error and Warning Messages
1886
1887 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1888
1889 @cindex error messages
1890 @cindex warning messages
1891 @cindex messages from assembler
1892 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1893 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1894 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1895 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1896 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1897
1898 @c man end
1899
1900 @cindex format of warning messages
1901 Warning messages have the format
1902
1903 @smallexample
1904 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1905 @end smallexample
1906
1907 @noindent
1908 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1909 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1910 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1911 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1912 @ifset GENERIC
1913 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1914 @end ifset
1915 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1916 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1917 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1918 tradition).
1919
1920 @cindex format of error messages
1921 Error messages have the format
1922 @smallexample
1923 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1924 @end smallexample
1925 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1926 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1927 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1928
1929 @node Invoking
1930 @chapter Command-Line Options
1931
1932 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1933 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1934 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1935 for options specific
1936 @ifclear GENERIC
1937 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1938 @end ifclear
1939 @ifset GENERIC
1940 to particular machine architectures.
1941 @end ifset
1942
1943 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1944
1945 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1946 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1947 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1948 by commas. For example:
1949
1950 @smallexample
1951 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1952 @end smallexample
1953
1954 @noindent
1955 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1956 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1957 local symbols in the symbol table).
1958
1959 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1960 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1961 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1962 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1963 assembler.)
1964
1965 @c man end
1966
1967 @menu
1968 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1969 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1970 * D:: -D for compatibility
1971 * f:: -f to work faster
1972 * I:: -I for .include search path
1973 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1974 * K:: -K for compatibility
1975 @end ifclear
1976 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1977 * K:: -K for difference tables
1978 @end ifset
1979
1980 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
1981 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1982 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1983 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
1984 * o:: -o to name the object file
1985 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
1986 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1987 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1988 * v:: -v to announce version
1989 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1990 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
1991 @end menu
1992
1993 @node a
1994 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1995
1996 @kindex -a
1997 @kindex -ac
1998 @kindex -ad
1999 @kindex -ag
2000 @kindex -ah
2001 @kindex -al
2002 @kindex -an
2003 @kindex -as
2004 @cindex listings, enabling
2005 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2006
2007 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2008 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2009 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2010 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2011 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2012 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2013 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2014 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2015 also.
2016
2017 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2018 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2019
2020 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2021 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2022 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2023 omitted from the listing.
2024
2025 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2026 listing.
2027
2028 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2029 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2030 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2031 @code{.sbttl}.
2032 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2033 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2034 listing-control directives have no effect.
2035
2036 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2037 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2038
2039 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2040 because it
2041 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2042 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2043 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2044 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2045 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2046
2047 @node alternate
2048 @section @option{--alternate}
2049
2050 @kindex --alternate
2051 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2052
2053 @node D
2054 @section @option{-D}
2055
2056 @kindex -D
2057 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2058 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2059 @command{@value{AS}}.
2060
2061 @node f
2062 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2063
2064 @kindex -f
2065 @cindex trusted compiler
2066 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2067 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2068 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2069 and comment preprocessing on
2070 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2071 ,Preprocessing}.
2072
2073 @quotation
2074 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2075 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2076 not work correctly.
2077 @end quotation
2078
2079 @node I
2080 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2081
2082 @kindex -I @var{path}
2083 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2084 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2085 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2086 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2087 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2088 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2089 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2090 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2091 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2092 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2093
2094 @node K
2095 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2096
2097 @kindex -K
2098 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2099 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2100 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2101 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2102 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2103 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2104 alteration on other platforms.
2105 @end ifclear
2106
2107 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2108 @cindex difference tables, warning
2109 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2110 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2111 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2112 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2113 is done.
2114 @end ifset
2115
2116 @node L
2117 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2118
2119 @kindex -L
2120 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2121 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2122 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2123 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2124 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2125 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2126 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2127 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2128
2129 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2130 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2131 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2132
2133 @node listing
2134 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2135
2136 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2137 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2138 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2139 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2140 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2141 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2142 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2143 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2144
2145 @table @gcctabopt
2146 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2147 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2148 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2149 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2150 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2151
2152 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2153 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2154 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2155 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2156 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2157 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2158 switch is used the default is to one.
2159
2160 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2161 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2162 @cindex Width of source line output
2163 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2164 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2165 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2166
2167 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2168 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2169 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2170 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2171 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2172 @end table
2173
2174 @node M
2175 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2176
2177 @kindex -M
2178 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2179 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2180 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2181 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2182 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2183 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2184 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2185 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2186 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2187
2188 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2189 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2190 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2191 individually. These are:
2192
2193 @itemize @bullet
2194 @item global symbols in common section
2195
2196 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2197 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2198 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2199 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2200 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2201
2202 @item complex relocations
2203
2204 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2205 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2206 are not support by other object file formats.
2207
2208 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2209
2210 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2211 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2212 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2213 script.
2214
2215 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2216
2217 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2218 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2219
2220 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2221
2222 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2223 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2224 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2225 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2226 assigned within a linker script.
2227 @end itemize
2228
2229 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2230 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2231 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2232
2233 @itemize @bullet
2234
2235 @item EBCDIC strings
2236
2237 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2238
2239 @item packed binary coded decimal
2240
2241 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2242 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2243
2244 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2245
2246 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2247
2248 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2249
2250 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2251
2252 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2253
2254 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2255 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2256 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2257 these options serve no purpose.
2258
2259 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2260
2261 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2262 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2263 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2264
2265 @item other @code{OPT} options
2266
2267 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2268 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2269
2270 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2271
2272 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2273 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2274
2275 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2276
2277 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2278
2279 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2280
2281 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2282
2283 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2284
2285 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2286
2287 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2288
2289 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2290
2291 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2292
2293 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2294
2295 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2296
2297 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2298
2299 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2300
2301 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2302
2303 @end itemize
2304
2305 @node MD
2306 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2307
2308 @kindex --MD
2309 @cindex dependency tracking
2310 @cindex make rules
2311
2312 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2313 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2314 dependencies of the main source file.
2315
2316 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2317
2318 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2319
2320 @node o
2321 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2322
2323 @kindex -o
2324 @cindex naming object file
2325 @cindex object file name
2326 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2327 default it has the name
2328 @ifset GENERIC
2329 @ifset I960
2330 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2331 @end ifset
2332 @ifclear I960
2333 @file{a.out}.
2334 @end ifclear
2335 @end ifset
2336 @ifclear GENERIC
2337 @ifset I960
2338 @file{b.out}.
2339 @end ifset
2340 @ifclear I960
2341 @file{a.out}.
2342 @end ifclear
2343 @end ifclear
2344 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2345 object file a different name.
2346
2347 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2348 existing file of the same name.
2349
2350 @node R
2351 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2352
2353 @kindex -R
2354 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2355 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2356 @cindex joining text and data sections
2357 @cindex merging text and data sections
2358 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2359 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2360 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2361 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2362 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2363 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2364
2365 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2366 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2367 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2368 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2369
2370 @ifset COFF-ELF
2371 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2372 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2373 @samp{.data}.
2374 @end ifset
2375
2376 @ifset HPPA
2377 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2378 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2379 @end ifset
2380
2381 @node statistics
2382 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2383
2384 @kindex --statistics
2385 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2386 @cindex time, total for assembly
2387 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2388 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2389 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2390 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2391 seconds).
2392
2393 @node traditional-format
2394 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2395
2396 @kindex --traditional-format
2397 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2398 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2399 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2400
2401 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2402 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2403
2404 @node v
2405 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2406
2407 @kindex -v
2408 @kindex -version
2409 @cindex assembler version
2410 @cindex version of assembler
2411 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2412 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2413 command line.
2414
2415 @node W
2416 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2417
2418 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2419 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2420 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2421 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2422
2423 @kindex -W
2424 @kindex --no-warn
2425 @cindex suppressing warnings
2426 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2427 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2428 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2429 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2430 are still reported.
2431
2432 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2433 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2434 @cindex warnings, causing error
2435 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2436 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2437
2438 @kindex --warn
2439 @cindex warnings, switching on
2440 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2441 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2442
2443 @node Z
2444 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2445 @cindex object file, after errors
2446 @cindex errors, continuing after
2447 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2448 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2449 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2450 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2451 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2452 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2453
2454 @node Syntax
2455 @chapter Syntax
2456
2457 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2458 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2459 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2460 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2461 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2462 @ifclear VAX
2463 assembler.
2464 @end ifclear
2465 @ifset VAX
2466 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2467 @end ifset
2468
2469 @menu
2470 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2471 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2472 * Comments:: Comments
2473 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2474 * Statements:: Statements
2475 * Constants:: Constants
2476 @end menu
2477
2478 @node Preprocessing
2479 @section Preprocessing
2480
2481 @cindex preprocessing
2482 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2483 @itemize @bullet
2484 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2485 @item
2486 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2487 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2488 a single space.
2489
2490 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2491 @item
2492 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2493 appropriate number of newlines.
2494
2495 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2496 @item
2497 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2498 @end itemize
2499
2500 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2501 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2502 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2503 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2504 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2505 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2506 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2507
2508 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2509 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2510 preprocessed.
2511
2512 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2513 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2514 @kindex #NO_APP
2515 @kindex #APP
2516 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2517 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2518 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2519 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2520 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2521 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2522 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2523 and whitespace.
2524
2525 @node Whitespace
2526 @section Whitespace
2527
2528 @cindex whitespace
2529 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2530 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2531 people to read. Unless within character constants
2532 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2533 as exactly one space.
2534
2535 @node Comments
2536 @section Comments
2537
2538 @cindex comments
2539 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2540 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2541
2542 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2543 This means you may not nest these comments.
2544
2545 @smallexample
2546 /*
2547 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2548 is to use this sort of comment.
2549 */
2550
2551 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2552 @end smallexample
2553
2554 @cindex line comment character
2555 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2556 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2557 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2558 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2559 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2560 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2561 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2562 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2563
2564 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2565 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2566 to specify logical line numbers:
2567
2568 @kindex #
2569 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2570 @cindex logical line numbers
2571 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2572 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2573 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2574 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2575 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2576
2577 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2578 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2579
2580 @smallexample
2581 # This is an ordinary comment.
2582 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2583 # This is logical line # 36.
2584 @end smallexample
2585 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2586 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2587
2588 @node Symbol Intro
2589 @section Symbols
2590
2591 @cindex characters used in symbols
2592 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2593 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2594 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2595 @samp{_.$}.
2596 @end ifclear
2597 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2598 @ifclear GENERIC
2599 @ifset H8
2600 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2601 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2602 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2603 symbol names.)
2604 @end ifset
2605 @end ifclear
2606 @end ifset
2607 @ifset GENERIC
2608 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2609 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2610 @end ifset
2611 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2612 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2613 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2614 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2615 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2616 @cindex length of symbols
2617
2618 @node Statements
2619 @section Statements
2620
2621 @cindex statements, structure of
2622 @cindex line separator character
2623 @cindex statement separator character
2624
2625 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2626 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2627 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2628 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2629 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2630 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2631 exception: they do not end statements.
2632
2633 @cindex newline, required at file end
2634 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2635 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2636 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2637
2638 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2639
2640 @cindex instructions and directives
2641 @cindex directives and instructions
2642 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2643 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2644 @c 13feb91.
2645 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2646 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2647 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2648 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2649 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2650 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2651 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2652 @ifset GENERIC
2653 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2654 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2655 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2656 language.@refill
2657 @end ifset
2658
2659 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2660 @cindex label (@code{:})
2661 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2662 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2663 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2664
2665 @ifset HPPA
2666 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2667 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2668 only one label may be defined on each line.
2669 @end ifset
2670
2671 @smallexample
2672 label: .directive followed by something
2673 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2674 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2675 @end smallexample
2676
2677 @node Constants
2678 @section Constants
2679
2680 @cindex constants
2681 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2682 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2683 @smallexample
2684 @group
2685 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2686 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2687 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2688 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2689 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2690 @end group
2691 @end smallexample
2692
2693 @menu
2694 * Characters:: Character Constants
2695 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2696 @end menu
2697
2698 @node Characters
2699 @subsection Character Constants
2700
2701 @cindex character constants
2702 @cindex constants, character
2703 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2704 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2705 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2706 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2707 used in arithmetic expressions.
2708
2709 @menu
2710 * Strings:: Strings
2711 * Chars:: Characters
2712 @end menu
2713
2714 @node Strings
2715 @subsubsection Strings
2716
2717 @cindex string constants
2718 @cindex constants, string
2719 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2720 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2721 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2722 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2723 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2724 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2725 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2726 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2727
2728 @cindex escape codes, character
2729 @cindex character escape codes
2730 @table @kbd
2731 @c @item \a
2732 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2733 @c
2734 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2735 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2736 @item \b
2737 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2738
2739 @c @item \e
2740 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2741 @c
2742 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2743 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2744 @item \f
2745 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2746
2747 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2748 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2749 @item \n
2750 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2751
2752 @c @item \p
2753 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2754 @c
2755 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2756 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2757 @item \r
2758 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2759
2760 @c @item \s
2761 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2762 @c other assemblers.
2763 @c
2764 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2765 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2766 @item \t
2767 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2768
2769 @c @item \v
2770 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2771 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2772 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2773 @c
2774 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2775 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2776 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2777 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2778 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2779 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2780
2781 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2782 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2783 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2784 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2785 lower case @code{x} works.
2786
2787 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2788 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2789 @item \\
2790 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2791
2792 @c @item \'
2793 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2794 @c This is needed in single character literals
2795 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2796 @c a @samp{'}.
2797 @c
2798 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2799 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2800 @item \"
2801 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2802 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2803
2804 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2805 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2806 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2807 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2808 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2809 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2810 code and warns you of the fact.
2811 @end table
2812
2813 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2814 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2815 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2816 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2817 sequence.
2818
2819 @node Chars
2820 @subsubsection Characters
2821
2822 @cindex single character constant
2823 @cindex character, single
2824 @cindex constant, single character
2825 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2826 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2827 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2828 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2829 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2830 grave accent. A newline
2831 @ifclear GENERIC
2832 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2833 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2834 @end ifclear
2835 @ifset abnormal-separator
2836 @ifset H8
2837 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2838 Renesas SH)
2839 @end ifset
2840 @end ifset
2841 @end ifclear
2842 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2843 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2844 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2845 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2846 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2847
2848 @node Numbers
2849 @subsection Number Constants
2850
2851 @cindex constants, number
2852 @cindex number constants
2853 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2854 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2855 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2856 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2857 are floating point numbers, described below.
2858
2859 @menu
2860 * Integers:: Integers
2861 * Bignums:: Bignums
2862 * Flonums:: Flonums
2863 @ifclear GENERIC
2864 @ifset I960
2865 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2866 @end ifset
2867 @end ifclear
2868 @end menu
2869
2870 @node Integers
2871 @subsubsection Integers
2872 @cindex integers
2873 @cindex constants, integer
2874
2875 @cindex binary integers
2876 @cindex integers, binary
2877 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2878 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2879
2880 @cindex octal integers
2881 @cindex integers, octal
2882 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2883 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2884
2885 @cindex decimal integers
2886 @cindex integers, decimal
2887 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2888 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2889
2890 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2891 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2892 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2893 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2894
2895 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2896 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2897 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2898
2899 @node Bignums
2900 @subsubsection Bignums
2901
2902 @cindex bignums
2903 @cindex constants, bignum
2904 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2905 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2906 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2907 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2908
2909 @node Flonums
2910 @subsubsection Flonums
2911 @cindex flonums
2912 @cindex floating point numbers
2913 @cindex constants, floating point
2914
2915 @cindex precision, floating point
2916 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2917 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2918 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2919 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2920 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2921 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2922
2923 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2924 @itemize @bullet
2925 @item
2926 The digit @samp{0}.
2927 @ifset HPPA
2928 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2929 @end ifset
2930
2931 @item
2932 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2933 @ifset GENERIC
2934 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2935 @ignore
2936 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2937 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2938 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2939 @end ignore
2940
2941 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2942 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2943 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2944
2945 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2946 (in upper or lower case).
2947
2948 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2949 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2950
2951 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2952 @end ifset
2953 @ifclear GENERIC
2954 @ifset ARC
2955 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2956 @end ifset
2957 @ifset H8
2958 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2959 @end ifset
2960 @ifset HPPA
2961 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2962 @end ifset
2963 @ifset I960
2964 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2965 @end ifset
2966 @end ifclear
2967
2968 @item
2969 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2970
2971 @item
2972 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2973
2974 @item
2975 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2976 or more decimal digits.
2977
2978 @item
2979 An optional exponent, consisting of:
2980
2981 @itemize @bullet
2982 @item
2983 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2984 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2985 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2986 @item
2987 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2988 @item
2989 One or more decimal digits.
2990 @end itemize
2991
2992 @end itemize
2993
2994 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2995 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2996
2997 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
2998 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2999 @command{@value{AS}}.
3000
3001 @ifclear GENERIC
3002 @ifset I960
3003 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3004 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3005 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3006 @node Bit Fields
3007 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3008
3009 @cindex bit fields
3010 @cindex constants, bit field
3011 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3012 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3013 @example
3014 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3015 @end example
3016 @noindent
3017 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3018 @var{value}.
3019
3020 The resulting number is then packed
3021 @ifset GENERIC
3022 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3023 (in host-dependent byte order)
3024 @end ifset
3025 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3026 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3027 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3028 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3029 least significant digits.@refill
3030
3031 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3032 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3033 @end ifset
3034 @end ifclear
3035
3036 @node Sections
3037 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3038 @cindex sections
3039 @cindex relocation
3040
3041 @menu
3042 * Secs Background:: Background
3043 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3044 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3045 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3046 * bss:: bss Section
3047 @end menu
3048
3049 @node Secs Background
3050 @section Background
3051
3052 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3053 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3054 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3055
3056 @cindex linker, and assembler
3057 @cindex assembler, and linker
3058 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3059 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3060 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3061 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3062 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3063 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3064 sections.
3065
3066 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3067 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3068 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3069 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3070 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3071 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3072 the proper run-time addresses.
3073 @ifset H8
3074 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3075 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3076 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3077 @end ifset
3078
3079 @cindex standard assembler sections
3080 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3081 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3082 @dfn{bss} sections.
3083
3084 @ifset COFF-ELF
3085 @ifset GENERIC
3086 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3087 @end ifset
3088 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3089 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3090 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3091 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3092 @end ifset
3093
3094 @ifset HPPA
3095 @ifset GENERIC
3096 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3097 @end ifset
3098 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3099 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3100 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3101 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3102 assembler directives.
3103
3104 @ifset SOM
3105 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3106 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3107 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3108 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3109 @end ifset
3110 @end ifset
3111
3112 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3113 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3114
3115 @ifset HPPA
3116 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3117 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3118 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3119 @end ifset
3120
3121 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3122 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3123 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3124 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3125 file is mentioned:
3126 @itemize @bullet
3127 @item
3128 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3129 an address?
3130 @item
3131 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3132 @item
3133 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3134 @display
3135 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3136 @end display
3137 @item
3138 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3139 @end itemize
3140
3141 @cindex addresses, format of
3142 @cindex section-relative addressing
3143 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3144 @display
3145 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3146 @end display
3147 @noindent
3148 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3149 nature.
3150 @ifset SOM
3151 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3152 symbol-relative instead.)
3153 @end ifset
3154
3155 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3156 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3157
3158 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3159 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3160 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3161 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3162 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3163 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3164 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3165 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3166 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3167
3168 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3169 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3170 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3171 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3172 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3173 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3174 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3175
3176 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3177 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3178 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3179 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3180 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3181 data and bss sections.
3182
3183 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3184 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3185
3186 @node Ld Sections
3187 @section Linker Sections
3188 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3189
3190 @table @strong
3191
3192 @ifset COFF-ELF
3193 @cindex named sections
3194 @cindex sections, named
3195 @item named sections
3196 @end ifset
3197 @ifset aout-bout
3198 @cindex text section
3199 @cindex data section
3200 @itemx text section
3201 @itemx data section
3202 @end ifset
3203 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3204 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3205 true of another.
3206 @c @ifset aout-bout
3207 When the program is running, however, it is
3208 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3209 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3210 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3211 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3212 in the data section.
3213 @c @end ifset
3214
3215 @cindex bss section
3216 @item bss section
3217 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3218 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3219 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3220 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3221 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3222 those explicit zeros from object files.
3223
3224 @cindex absolute section
3225 @item absolute section
3226 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3227 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3228 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3229 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3230
3231 @cindex undefined section
3232 @item undefined section
3233 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3234 the preceding sections.
3235 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3236 @end table
3237
3238 @cindex relocation example
3239 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3240 @ifset COFF-ELF
3241 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3242 @end ifset
3243 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3244
3245 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3246 @ifnottex
3247 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3248 @smallexample
3249 +-----+----+--+
3250 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3251 +-----+----+--+
3252
3253 text data bss
3254 seg. seg. seg.
3255
3256 +---+---+---+
3257 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3258 +---+---+---+
3259
3260 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3261 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3262 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3263
3264 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3265 @end smallexample
3266 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3267 @end ifnottex
3268 @need 5000
3269 @tex
3270 \bigskip
3271 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3272 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3273 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3274
3275 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3276 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3277 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3278
3279 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3280 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3281 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3282 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3283 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3284
3285 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3286 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3287
3288 @end tex
3289 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3290
3291 @node As Sections
3292 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3293
3294 @cindex internal assembler sections
3295 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3296 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3297 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3298 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3299 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3300 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3301 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3302 section-relative address.
3303
3304 @table @b
3305 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3306 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3307 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3308 bug in the assembler.
3309
3310 @cindex expr (internal section)
3311 @item expr section
3312 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3313 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3314 it in the expr section.
3315 @c FIXME item debug
3316 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3317 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3318 @c FIXME item register
3319 @end table
3320
3321 @node Sub-Sections
3322 @section Sub-Sections
3323
3324 @cindex numbered subsections
3325 @cindex grouping data
3326 @ifset aout-bout
3327 Assembled bytes
3328 @ifset COFF-ELF
3329 conventionally
3330 @end ifset
3331 fall into two sections: text and data.
3332 @end ifset
3333 You may have separate groups of
3334 @ifset GENERIC
3335 data in named sections
3336 @end ifset
3337 @ifclear GENERIC
3338 @ifclear aout-bout
3339 data in named sections
3340 @end ifclear
3341 @ifset aout-bout
3342 text or data
3343 @end ifset
3344 @end ifclear
3345 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3346 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3347 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3348 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3349 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3350 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3351 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3352 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3353 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3354 constants being output.
3355
3356 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3357 goes in subsection number zero.
3358
3359 @ifset GENERIC
3360 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3361 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3362 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3363 @end ifset
3364 @ifclear GENERIC
3365 @ifset H8
3366 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3367 boundary (two bytes).
3368 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3369 @end ifset
3370 @ifset I960
3371 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3372 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3373 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3374 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3375 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3376 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3377 @end ifset
3378 @end ifclear
3379
3380 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3381 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3382 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3383 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3384 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3385 data subsections as a data section.
3386
3387 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3388 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3389 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3390 @ifset COFF
3391 @ifset GENERIC
3392 When generating COFF output, you
3393 @end ifset
3394 @ifclear GENERIC
3395 You
3396 @end ifclear
3397 can also use an extra subsection
3398 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3399 @var{expression}}.
3400 @end ifset
3401 @ifset ELF
3402 @ifset GENERIC
3403 When generating ELF output, you
3404 @end ifset
3405 @ifclear GENERIC
3406 You
3407 @end ifclear
3408 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3409 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3410 @end ifset
3411 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3412 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3413 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3414 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3415 @smallexample
3416 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3417 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3418 .text 1
3419 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3420 .data 0
3421 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3422 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3423 .text 0
3424 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3425 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3426 @end smallexample
3427
3428 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3429 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3430 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3431 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3432 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3433 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3434 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3435
3436 @node bss
3437 @section bss Section
3438
3439 @cindex bss section
3440 @cindex common variable storage
3441 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3442 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3443 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3444 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3445 section are zeroed bytes.
3446
3447 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3448 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3449
3450 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3451 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3452
3453 @ifset GENERIC
3454 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3455 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3456 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3457 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3458 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3459 @end ifset
3460
3461 @node Symbols
3462 @chapter Symbols
3463
3464 @cindex symbols
3465 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3466 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3467 to debug.
3468
3469 @quotation
3470 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3471 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3472 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3473 @end quotation
3474
3475 @menu
3476 * Labels:: Labels
3477 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3478 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3479 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3480 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3481 @end menu
3482
3483 @node Labels
3484 @section Labels
3485
3486 @cindex labels
3487 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3488 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3489 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3490 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3491 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3492 definitions.
3493
3494 @ifset HPPA
3495 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3496 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3497 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3498 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3499 @end ifset
3500
3501 @node Setting Symbols
3502 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3503
3504 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3505 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3506 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3507 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3508 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3509 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3510 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3511 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3512
3513 @ifset Blackfin
3514 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3515 @end ifset
3516
3517 @node Symbol Names
3518 @section Symbol Names
3519
3520 @cindex symbol names
3521 @cindex names, symbol
3522 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3523 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3524 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3525 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3526 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3527 particular target machine), and underscores.
3528 @end ifclear
3529 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3530 @ifset H8
3531 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3532 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3533 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3534 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3535 @end ifset
3536 @end ifset
3537
3538 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3539 than @code{Foo}.
3540
3541 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3542 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3543 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3544 currently supported.
3545
3546 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3547 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3548 in a program.
3549
3550 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3551
3552 @cindex local symbol names
3553 @cindex symbol names, local
3554 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3555 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3556 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3557 set of local label prefixes.
3558 @ifset HPPA
3559 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3560 @end ifset
3561
3562 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3563 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3564 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3565 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3566
3567 @subheading Local Labels
3568
3569 @cindex local labels
3570 @cindex temporary symbol names
3571 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3572 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3573 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3574 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3575 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3576 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3577 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3578 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3579 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3580 for ``forwards''.
3581
3582 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3583 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3584 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3585 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3586 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3587 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3588 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3589
3590 Here is an example:
3591
3592 @smallexample
3593 1: branch 1f
3594 2: branch 1b
3595 1: branch 2f
3596 2: branch 1b
3597 @end smallexample
3598
3599 Which is the equivalent of:
3600
3601 @smallexample
3602 label_1: branch label_3
3603 label_2: branch label_1
3604 label_3: branch label_4
3605 label_4: branch label_3
3606 @end smallexample
3607
3608 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3609 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3610 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3611 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3612 these parts:
3613
3614 @table @code
3615 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3616 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3617 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3618 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3619 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3620 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3621 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3622 you may use them in debugging.
3623
3624 @item @var{number}
3625 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3626 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3627
3628 @item @kbd{C-B}
3629 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3630 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3631
3632 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3633 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3634 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3635 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3636 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3637 @end table
3638
3639 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3640 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3641
3642 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3643 @cindex dollar local symbols
3644
3645 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3646 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3647 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3648 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3649 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3650 the same local label.
3651
3652 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3653 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3654 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3655
3656 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3657 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3658 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3659 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3660
3661 @node Dot
3662 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3663
3664 @cindex dot (symbol)
3665 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3666 @cindex current address
3667 @cindex location counter
3668 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3669 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3670 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3671 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3672 directive.
3673 @ifclear no-space-dir
3674 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3675 @samp{.space 4}.
3676 @end ifclear
3677
3678 @node Symbol Attributes
3679 @section Symbol Attributes
3680
3681 @cindex symbol attributes
3682 @cindex attributes, symbol
3683 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3684 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3685 attributes.
3686 @ifset INTERNALS
3687 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3688 @end ifset
3689
3690 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3691 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3692 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3693 would want.
3694
3695 @menu
3696 * Symbol Value:: Value
3697 * Symbol Type:: Type
3698 @ifset aout-bout
3699 @ifset GENERIC
3700 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3701 @end ifset
3702 @ifclear GENERIC
3703 @ifclear BOUT
3704 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3705 @end ifclear
3706 @ifset BOUT
3707 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3708 @end ifset
3709 @end ifclear
3710 @end ifset
3711 @ifset COFF
3712 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3713 @end ifset
3714 @ifset SOM
3715 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3716 @end ifset
3717 @end menu
3718
3719 @node Symbol Value
3720 @subsection Value
3721
3722 @cindex value of a symbol
3723 @cindex symbol value
3724 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3725 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3726 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3727 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3728 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3729 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3730 called absolute.
3731
3732 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3733 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3734 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3735 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3736 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3737 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3738 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3739 allocated storage.
3740
3741 @node Symbol Type
3742 @subsection Type
3743
3744 @cindex type of a symbol
3745 @cindex symbol type
3746 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3747 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3748 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3749 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3750
3751 @ifset aout-bout
3752 @ifclear GENERIC
3753 @ifset BOUT
3754 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3755 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3756 @need 1000
3757 @node a.out Symbols
3758 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3759
3760 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3761 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3762 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3763 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3764 @code{b.out}.
3765
3766 @end ifset
3767 @ifclear BOUT
3768 @node a.out Symbols
3769 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3770
3771 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3772 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3773
3774 @end ifclear
3775 @end ifclear
3776 @ifset GENERIC
3777 @node a.out Symbols
3778 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3779
3780 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3781 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3782
3783 @end ifset
3784 @menu
3785 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3786 * Symbol Other:: Other
3787 @end menu
3788
3789 @node Symbol Desc
3790 @subsubsection Descriptor
3791
3792 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3793 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3794 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3795 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3796 @command{@value{AS}}.
3797
3798 @node Symbol Other
3799 @subsubsection Other
3800
3801 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3802 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3803 @end ifset
3804
3805 @ifset COFF
3806 @node COFF Symbols
3807 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3808
3809 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3810 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3811
3812 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3813 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3814 @code{.endef} directives.
3815
3816 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3817
3818 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3819 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3820 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3821
3822 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3823
3824 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3825 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3826 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3827 table information for COFF.
3828 @end ifset
3829
3830 @ifset SOM
3831 @node SOM Symbols
3832 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3833
3834 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3835 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3836
3837 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3838 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3839
3840 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3841 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3842 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3843 @end ifset
3844
3845 @node Expressions
3846 @chapter Expressions
3847
3848 @cindex expressions
3849 @cindex addresses
3850 @cindex numeric values
3851 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3852 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3853
3854 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3855 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3856 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3857 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3858 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3859 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3860
3861 @menu
3862 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3863 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3864 @end menu
3865
3866 @node Empty Exprs
3867 @section Empty Expressions
3868
3869 @cindex empty expressions
3870 @cindex expressions, empty
3871 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3872 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3873 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3874 is compatible with other assemblers.
3875
3876 @node Integer Exprs
3877 @section Integer Expressions
3878
3879 @cindex integer expressions
3880 @cindex expressions, integer
3881 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3882 by @emph{operators}.
3883
3884 @menu
3885 * Arguments:: Arguments
3886 * Operators:: Operators
3887 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3888 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3889 @end menu
3890
3891 @node Arguments
3892 @subsection Arguments
3893
3894 @cindex expression arguments
3895 @cindex arguments in expressions
3896 @cindex operands in expressions
3897 @cindex arithmetic operands
3898 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3899 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3900 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3901 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3902 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3903 instruction operands.
3904
3905 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3906 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3907 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3908 integer.
3909
3910 Numbers are usually integers.
3911
3912 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3913 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3914 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3915 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3916 assemblers.
3917
3918 @cindex subexpressions
3919 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3920 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3921 operator followed by an argument.
3922
3923 @node Operators
3924 @subsection Operators
3925
3926 @cindex operators, in expressions
3927 @cindex arithmetic functions
3928 @cindex functions, in expressions
3929 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3930 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3931 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3932 whitespace.
3933
3934 @node Prefix Ops
3935 @subsection Prefix Operator
3936
3937 @cindex prefix operators
3938 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3939 one argument, which must be absolute.
3940
3941 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3942 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3943 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3944 @tex
3945 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3946 @end tex
3947
3948 @table @code
3949 @item -
3950 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3951 @item ~
3952 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3953 @end table
3954
3955 @tex
3956 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3957 @end tex
3958
3959 @node Infix Ops
3960 @subsection Infix Operators
3961
3962 @cindex infix operators
3963 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3964 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3965 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3966 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3967 absolute, and the result is absolute.
3968
3969 @enumerate
3970 @cindex operator precedence
3971 @cindex precedence of operators
3972
3973 @item
3974 Highest Precedence
3975
3976 @table @code
3977 @item *
3978 @dfn{Multiplication}.
3979
3980 @item /
3981 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3982
3983 @item %
3984 @dfn{Remainder}.
3985
3986 @item <<
3987 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3988
3989 @item >>
3990 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3991 @end table
3992
3993 @item
3994 Intermediate precedence
3995
3996 @table @code
3997 @item |
3998
3999 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4000
4001 @item &
4002 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4003
4004 @item ^
4005 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4006
4007 @item !
4008 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4009 @end table
4010
4011 @item
4012 Low Precedence
4013
4014 @table @code
4015 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4016 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4017 @cindex arguments for addition
4018 @item +
4019 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4020 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4021 sections.
4022
4023 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4024 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4025 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4026 @item -
4027 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4028 result has the section of the left argument.
4029 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4030 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4031 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4032
4033 @cindex comparison expressions
4034 @cindex expressions, comparison
4035 @item ==
4036 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4037 @item <>
4038 @itemx !=
4039 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4040 @item <
4041 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4042 @item >
4043 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4044 @item >=
4045 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4046 @item <=
4047 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4048
4049 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4050 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4051 perform signed comparisons.
4052 @end table
4053
4054 @item Lowest Precedence
4055
4056 @table @code
4057 @item &&
4058 @dfn{Logical And}.
4059
4060 @item ||
4061 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4062
4063 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4064 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4065 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4066 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4067
4068 @end table
4069 @end enumerate
4070
4071 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4072 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4073
4074 @node Pseudo Ops
4075 @chapter Assembler Directives
4076
4077 @cindex directives, machine independent
4078 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4079 @cindex machine independent directives
4080 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4081 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4082
4083 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4084 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4085 @ifset GENERIC
4086 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4087 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4088 @end ifset
4089 @ifclear GENERIC
4090 @ifset machine-directives
4091 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4092 @end ifset
4093 @end ifclear
4094
4095 @menu
4096 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4097 @ifset COFF
4098 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4099 @end ifset
4100
4101 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4102 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4103 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4104 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4105 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4106 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4107 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4108 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4109 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4110 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4111 @ifset COFF
4112 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4113 @end ifset
4114 @ifset aout-bout
4115 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4116 @end ifset
4117 @ifset COFF
4118 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4119 @end ifset
4120
4121 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4122 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4123 * Else:: @code{.else}
4124 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4125 * End:: @code{.end}
4126 @ifset COFF
4127 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4128 @end ifset
4129
4130 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4131 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4132 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4133 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4134 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4135 * Err:: @code{.err}
4136 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4137 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4138 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4139 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4140 * File:: @code{.file}
4141 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4142 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4143 * Func:: @code{.func}
4144 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4145 @ifset ELF
4146 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4147 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4148 @end ifset
4149
4150 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4151 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4152 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4153 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4154 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4155 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4156 @ifset ELF
4157 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4158 @end ifset
4159
4160 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4161 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4162 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4163 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4164 @ifclear no-line-dir
4165 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4166 @end ifclear
4167
4168 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4169 * List:: @code{.list}
4170 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4171 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4172 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4173 @ifset ELF
4174 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4175 @end ifset
4176
4177 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4178 @ignore
4179 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4180 @end ignore
4181
4182 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4183 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4184 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4185 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4186 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4187 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4188 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4189 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4190 @ifset ELF
4191 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4192 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4193 @end ifset
4194
4195 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4196 @ifset ELF
4197 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4198 @end ifset
4199
4200 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4201 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4202 @ifset ELF
4203 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4204 @end ifset
4205
4206 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4207 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4208 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4209 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4210 @ifset COFF
4211 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4212 @end ifset
4213 @ifset COFF-ELF
4214 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4215 @end ifset
4216
4217 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4218 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4219 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4220 @ifset COFF-ELF
4221 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4222 @end ifset
4223 @ifclear no-space-dir
4224 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4225 @end ifclear
4226
4227 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4228 @ifclear no-space-dir
4229 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4230 @end ifclear
4231 @ifset have-stabs
4232 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4233 @end ifset
4234
4235 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4236 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4237 @ifset ELF
4238 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4239 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4240 @end ifset
4241
4242 @ifset COFF
4243 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4244 @end ifset
4245
4246 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4247 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4248 @ifset COFF-ELF
4249 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4250 @end ifset
4251
4252 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4253 @ifset COFF
4254 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4255 @end ifset
4256
4257 @ifset ELF
4258 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4259 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4260 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4261 @end ifset
4262
4263 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4264 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4265 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4266 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4267 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4268 @end menu
4269
4270 @node Abort
4271 @section @code{.abort}
4272
4273 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4274 @cindex stopping the assembly
4275 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4276 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4277 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4278 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4279 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4280
4281 @ifset COFF
4282 @node ABORT (COFF)
4283 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4284
4285 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4286 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4287 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4288
4289 @ifset BOUT
4290 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4291 but ignores it.
4292 @end ifset
4293 @end ifset
4294
4295 @node Align
4296 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4297
4298 @cindex padding the location counter
4299 @cindex @code{align} directive
4300 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4301 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4302 required, as described below.
4303
4304 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4305 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4306 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4307 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4308 with no-op instructions.
4309
4310 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4311 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4312 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4313 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4314 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4315 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4316 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4317
4318 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4319 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4320 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4321 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4322 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4323 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4324 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4325
4326 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4327 strongarm, it is the
4328 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4329 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4330 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4331 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4332
4333 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4334 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4335 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4336 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4337 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4338
4339 @node Altmacro
4340 @section @code{.altmacro}
4341 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4342
4343 @ftable @code
4344 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4345 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4346 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4347 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4348 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4349 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4350 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4351
4352 @item String delimiters
4353 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4354 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4355
4356 @table @code
4357 @item '@var{string}'
4358 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4359
4360 @item <@var{string}>
4361 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4362 @end table
4363
4364 @item single-character string escape
4365 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4366 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4367 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4368 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4369
4370 @item Expression results as strings
4371 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4372 and use the result as a string.
4373 @end ftable
4374
4375 @node Ascii
4376 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4377
4378 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4379 @cindex string literals
4380 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4381 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4382 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4383
4384 @node Asciz
4385 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4386
4387 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4388 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4389 @cindex null-terminated strings
4390 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4391 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4392
4393 @node Balign
4394 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4395
4396 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4397 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4398 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4399 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4400 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4401 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4402 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4403
4404 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4405 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4406 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4407 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4408 with no-op instructions.
4409
4410 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4411 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4412 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4413 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4414 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4415 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4416 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4417
4418 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4419 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4420 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4421 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4422 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4423 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4424 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4425 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4426 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4427 undefined.
4428
4429 @node Bundle directives
4430 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4431 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4432 @cindex bundle
4433 @cindex instruction bundle
4434 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4435 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4436 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4437 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4438 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4439 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4440 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4441
4442 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4443 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4444 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4445 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4446 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4447 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4448 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4449 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4450 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4451 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4452 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4453
4454 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4455 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4456 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4457 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4458 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4459 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4460 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4461 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4462 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4463
4464 @cindex bundle-locked
4465 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4466 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4467 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4468 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4469 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4470 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4471 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4472 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4473 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4474 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4475 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4476 bundle size.
4477
4478 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4479 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4480 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4481 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4482 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4483 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4484
4485 @node Byte
4486 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4487
4488 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4489 @cindex integers, one byte
4490 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4491 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4492
4493 @node CFI directives
4494 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4495 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4496 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4497 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4498 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4499 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4500 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4501 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4502
4503 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4504 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4505 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4506 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4507 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4508 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4509
4510 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4511 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4512
4513 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4514 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4515 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4516 unwind entry previously opened by
4517 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4518
4519 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4520 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4521 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4522 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4523 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4524 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4525 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4526 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4527 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4528 no personality routine.
4529
4530 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4531 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4532 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4533 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4534 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4535 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4536 no LSDA.
4537
4538 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4539 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4540 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4541
4542 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4543 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4544 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4545 remains the same.
4546
4547 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4548 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4549 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4550 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4551 CFA address.
4552
4553 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4554 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4555 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4556
4557 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4558 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4559 CFA.
4560
4561 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4562 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4563 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4564 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4565 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4566 code it's annotating.
4567
4568 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4569 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4570
4571 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4572 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4573 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4574 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4575
4576 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4577 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4578
4579 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4580 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4581 i.e. no restoration needed.
4582
4583 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4584 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4585 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4586 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4587 the previous saved state.
4588
4589 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4590 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4591 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4592
4593 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4594 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4595
4596 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4597 SPARC register window has been saved.
4598
4599 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4600 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4601 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4602 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4603
4604 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4605 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4606 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4607 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4608
4609 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4610 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4611 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4612 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4613 or another register.
4614
4615 @node Comm
4616 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4617
4618 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4619 @cindex symbol, common
4620 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4621 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4622 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4623 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4624 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4625 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4626 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4627 using the largest size.
4628
4629 @ifset COFF-ELF
4630 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4631 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4632 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4633 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4634 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4635 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4636 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4637 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4638 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4639 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4640 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4641 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4642 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4643 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4644 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4645 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4646 @end ifset
4647
4648 @ifset HPPA
4649 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4650 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4651 @end ifset
4652
4653 @node Data
4654 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4655
4656 @cindex @code{data} directive
4657 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4658 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4659 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4660 to zero.
4661
4662 @ifset COFF
4663 @node Def
4664 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4665
4666 @cindex @code{def} directive
4667 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4668 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4669 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4670 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4671 @ifset BOUT
4672
4673 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4674 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4675 but ignored.
4676 @end ifset
4677 @end ifset
4678
4679 @ifset aout-bout
4680 @node Desc
4681 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4682
4683 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4684 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4685 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4686 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4687 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4688
4689 @ifset COFF
4690 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4691 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4692 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4693 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4694 @end ifset
4695 @end ifset
4696
4697 @ifset COFF
4698 @node Dim
4699 @section @code{.dim}
4700
4701 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4702 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4703 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4704 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4705 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4706 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4707 @ifset BOUT
4708
4709 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4710 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4711 ignores it.
4712 @end ifset
4713 @end ifset
4714
4715 @node Double
4716 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4717
4718 @cindex @code{double} directive
4719 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4720 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4721 assembles floating point numbers.
4722 @ifset GENERIC
4723 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4724 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4725 @end ifset
4726 @ifclear GENERIC
4727 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4728 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4729 in @sc{ieee} format.
4730 @end ifset
4731 @end ifclear
4732
4733 @node Eject
4734 @section @code{.eject}
4735
4736 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4737 @cindex new page, in listings
4738 @cindex page, in listings
4739 @cindex listing control: new page
4740 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4741
4742 @node Else
4743 @section @code{.else}
4744
4745 @cindex @code{else} directive
4746 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4747 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4748 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4749 was false.
4750
4751 @node Elseif
4752 @section @code{.elseif}
4753
4754 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4755 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4756 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4757 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4758
4759 @node End
4760 @section @code{.end}
4761
4762 @cindex @code{end} directive
4763 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4764 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4765
4766 @ifset COFF
4767 @node Endef
4768 @section @code{.endef}
4769
4770 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4771 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4772 @code{.def}.
4773 @ifset BOUT
4774
4775 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4776 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4777 directive but ignores it.
4778 @end ifset
4779 @end ifset
4780
4781 @node Endfunc
4782 @section @code{.endfunc}
4783 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4784 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4785
4786 @node Endif
4787 @section @code{.endif}
4788
4789 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4790 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4791 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4792 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4793
4794 @node Equ
4795 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4796
4797 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4798 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4799 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4800 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4801 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4802
4803 @ifset HPPA
4804 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4805 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4806 @end ifset
4807
4808 @ifset Z80
4809 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4810 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4811 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4812 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4813 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4814 @end ifset
4815
4816 @node Equiv
4817 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4818 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4819 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4820 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4821 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4822 undefined.
4823
4824 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4825 @smallexample
4826 .ifdef SYM
4827 .err
4828 .endif
4829 .equ SYM,VAL
4830 @end smallexample
4831 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4832
4833 @node Eqv
4834 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4835 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4836 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4837 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4838 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4839 value is taken.
4840
4841 @node Err
4842 @section @code{.err}
4843 @cindex @code{err} directive
4844 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4845 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4846 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4847
4848 @node Error
4849 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4850 @cindex error directive
4851
4852 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4853 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4854 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4855 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4856
4857 @smallexample
4858 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4859 @end smallexample
4860
4861 @node Exitm
4862 @section @code{.exitm}
4863 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4864
4865 @node Extern
4866 @section @code{.extern}
4867
4868 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4869 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4870 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4871 all undefined symbols as external.
4872
4873 @node Fail
4874 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4875
4876 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4877 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4878 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4879 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4880 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4881 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4882
4883 @node File
4884 @section @code{.file}
4885 @cindex @code{file} directive
4886
4887 @ifclear no-file-dir
4888 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4889 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4890 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4891
4892 @subheading Default Version
4893
4894 @cindex logical file name
4895 @cindex file name, logical
4896 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4897 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4898
4899 @smallexample
4900 .file @var{string}
4901 @end smallexample
4902
4903 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4904 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4905 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4906 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4907 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4908
4909 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4910 @end ifclear
4911
4912 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4913 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4914
4915 @smallexample
4916 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4917 @end smallexample
4918
4919 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4920 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4921 literal.
4922
4923 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4924 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4925 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4926 entries will have.
4927
4928 @node Fill
4929 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4930
4931 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4932 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4933 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4934 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4935 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4936 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4937 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4938 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4939 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4940 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4941 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4942 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4943 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4944 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4945
4946 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4947 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4948 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4949 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4950
4951 @node Float
4952 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4953
4954 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4955 @cindex @code{float} directive
4956 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4957 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4958 @ifset GENERIC
4959 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4960 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4961 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4962 @end ifset
4963 @ifclear GENERIC
4964 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4965 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4966 in @sc{ieee} format.
4967 @end ifset
4968 @end ifclear
4969
4970 @node Func
4971 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4972 @cindex @code{func} directive
4973 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4974 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4975 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4976 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4977 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4978 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4979 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4980 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4981
4982 @node Global
4983 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4984
4985 @cindex @code{global} directive
4986 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4987 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
4988 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4989 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
4990 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4991 from another file linked into the same program.
4992
4993 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4994 compatibility with other assemblers.
4995
4996 @ifset HPPA
4997 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4998 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4999 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5000 @end ifset
5001
5002 @ifset ELF
5003 @node Gnu_attribute
5004 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5005 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5006
5007 @node Hidden
5008 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5009
5010 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5011 @cindex visibility
5012 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5013 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5014 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5015
5016 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5017 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5018 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5019 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5020 @end ifset
5021
5022 @node hword
5023 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5024
5025 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5026 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5027 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5028 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5029 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5030 a 16 bit number for each.
5031
5032 @ifset GENERIC
5033 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5034 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5035 @end ifset
5036 @ifclear GENERIC
5037 @ifset W32
5038 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5039 @end ifset
5040 @ifset W16
5041 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5042 @end ifset
5043 @end ifclear
5044
5045 @node Ident
5046 @section @code{.ident}
5047
5048 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5049
5050 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5051 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5052 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5053 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5054 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5055 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5056 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5057
5058 @node If
5059 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5060
5061 @cindex conditional assembly
5062 @cindex @code{if} directive
5063 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5064 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5065 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5066 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5067 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5068 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5069 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5070 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5071
5072 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5073 @table @code
5074 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5075 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5076 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5077 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5078 is considered to be undefined.
5079
5080 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5081 @item .ifb @var{text}
5082 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5083
5084 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5085 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5086 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5087 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5088 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5089 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5090 string comparison is case sensitive.
5091
5092 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5093 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5094 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5095
5096 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5097 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5098 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5099
5100 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5101 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5102 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5103 equal to zero.
5104
5105 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5106 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5107 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5108
5109 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5110 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5111 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5112 to zero.
5113
5114 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5115 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5116 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5117
5118 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5119 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5120 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5121 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5122
5123 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5124 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5125 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5126 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5127
5128 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5129 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5130 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5131 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5132 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5133 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5134 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5135
5136 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5137 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5138 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5139 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5140
5141 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5142 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5143 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5144 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5145 @end table
5146
5147 @node Incbin
5148 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5149
5150 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5151 @cindex binary files, including
5152 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5153 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5154 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5155 around @var{file}.
5156
5157 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5158 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5159 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5160 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5161 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5162
5163 @node Include
5164 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5165
5166 @cindex @code{include} directive
5167 @cindex supporting files, including
5168 @cindex files, including
5169 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5170 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5171 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5172 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5173 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5174 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5175 around @var{file}.
5176
5177 @node Int
5178 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5179
5180 @cindex @code{int} directive
5181 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5182 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5183 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5184 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5185 of target the assembly is for.
5186
5187 @ifclear GENERIC
5188 @ifset H8
5189 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5190 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5191 32-bit integers.
5192 @end ifset
5193 @end ifclear
5194
5195 @ifset ELF
5196 @node Internal
5197 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5198
5199 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5200 @cindex visibility
5201 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5202 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5203 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5204
5205 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5206 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5207 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5208 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5209 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5210 @end ifset
5211
5212 @node Irp
5213 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5214
5215 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5216 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5217 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5218 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5219 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5220 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5221 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5222 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5223
5224 For example, assembling
5225
5226 @example
5227 .irp param,1,2,3
5228 move d\param,sp@@-
5229 .endr
5230 @end example
5231
5232 is equivalent to assembling
5233
5234 @example
5235 move d1,sp@@-
5236 move d2,sp@@-
5237 move d3,sp@@-
5238 @end example
5239
5240 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5241
5242 @node Irpc
5243 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5244
5245 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5246 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5247 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5248 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5249 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5250 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5251 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5252 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5253
5254 For example, assembling
5255
5256 @example
5257 .irpc param,123
5258 move d\param,sp@@-
5259 .endr
5260 @end example
5261
5262 is equivalent to assembling
5263
5264 @example
5265 move d1,sp@@-
5266 move d2,sp@@-
5267 move d3,sp@@-
5268 @end example
5269
5270 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5271 at @xref{Macro}.
5272
5273 @node Lcomm
5274 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5275
5276 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5277 @cindex local common symbols
5278 @cindex symbols, local common
5279 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5280 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5281 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5282 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5283 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5284 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5285
5286 @ifset GENERIC
5287 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5288 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5289 @end ifset
5290
5291 @ifset HPPA
5292 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5293 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5294 @end ifset
5295
5296 @node Lflags
5297 @section @code{.lflags}
5298
5299 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5300 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5301 assemblers, but ignores it.
5302
5303 @ifclear no-line-dir
5304 @node Line
5305 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5306
5307 @cindex @code{line} directive
5308 @cindex logical line number
5309 @ifset aout-bout
5310 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5311 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5312 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5313 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5314 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5315 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5316 @end ifset
5317
5318 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5319 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5320 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5321 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5322 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5323
5324 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5325 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5326 debugging.
5327 @end ifclear
5328
5329 @node Linkonce
5330 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5331 @cindex COMDAT
5332 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5333 @cindex common sections
5334 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5335 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5336 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5337 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5338 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5339 unique.
5340
5341 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5342 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5343 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5344
5345 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5346 following strings. For example:
5347 @smallexample
5348 .linkonce same_size
5349 @end smallexample
5350 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5351
5352 @table @code
5353 @item discard
5354 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5355
5356 @item one_only
5357 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5358
5359 @item same_size
5360 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5361
5362 @item same_contents
5363 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5364 @end table
5365
5366 @node List
5367 @section @code{.list}
5368
5369 @cindex @code{list} directive
5370 @cindex listing control, turning on
5371 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5372 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5373 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5374 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5375 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5376
5377 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5378 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5379 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5380
5381 @node Ln
5382 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5383
5384 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5385 @ifclear no-line-dir
5386 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5387 @end ifclear
5388 @ifset no-line-dir
5389 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5390 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5391 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5392 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5393 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5394 @ifset BOUT
5395
5396 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5397 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5398 output format.
5399 @end ifset
5400 @end ifset
5401
5402 @node Loc
5403 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5404 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5405 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5406 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5407 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5408 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5409 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5410 the row is added.
5411
5412 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5413
5414 @table @code
5415 @item basic_block
5416 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5417 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5418
5419 @item prologue_end
5420 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5421 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5422
5423 @item epilogue_begin
5424 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5425 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5426
5427 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5428 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5429 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5430 either 0 or 1.
5431
5432 @item isa @var{value}
5433 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5434 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5435
5436 @item discriminator @var{value}
5437 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5438 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5439
5440 @end table
5441
5442 @node Loc_mark_labels
5443 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5444 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5445 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5446 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5447 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5448 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5449 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5450 this function respectively.
5451
5452 @ifset ELF
5453 @node Local
5454 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5455
5456 @cindex @code{local} directive
5457 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5458 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5459 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5460 they will be created.
5461
5462 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5463 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5464 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5465 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5466 @end ifset
5467
5468 @node Long
5469 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5470
5471 @cindex @code{long} directive
5472 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5473
5474 @ignore
5475 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5476 @c what it really ought to do
5477 @node Lsym
5478 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5479
5480 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5481 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5482 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5483 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5484 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5485 the same as the expression value:
5486 @smallexample
5487 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5488 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5489 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5490 @end smallexample
5491 @noindent
5492 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5493 @end ignore
5494
5495 @node Macro
5496 @section @code{.macro}
5497
5498 @cindex macros
5499 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5500 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5501 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5502
5503 @example
5504 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5505 .long \from
5506 .if \to-\from
5507 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5508 .endif
5509 .endm
5510 @end example
5511
5512 @noindent
5513 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5514
5515 @example
5516 .long 0
5517 .long 1
5518 .long 2
5519 .long 3
5520 .long 4
5521 .long 5
5522 @end example
5523
5524 @ftable @code
5525 @item .macro @var{macname}
5526 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5527 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5528 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5529 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5530 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5531 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5532 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5533 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5534 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5535 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5536 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5537 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5538
5539 @table @code
5540 @item .macro comm
5541 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5542 arguments.
5543
5544 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5545 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5546 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5547 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5548 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5549
5550 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5551 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5552 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5553 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5554 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5555 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5556 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5557 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5558
5559 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5560 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5561 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5562 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5563 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5564
5565 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5566 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5567 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5568
5569 @end table
5570
5571 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5572 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5573 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5574 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5575 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5576 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5577 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5578 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5579 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5580 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5581 this macro definition:
5582
5583 @example
5584 .macro label l
5585 \l:
5586 .endm
5587 @end example
5588
5589 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5590 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5591 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5592 identifier.
5593
5594 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5595 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5596 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5597 length specifier like this:
5598
5599 @example
5600 .macro opcode base length
5601 \base.\length
5602 .endm
5603 @end example
5604
5605 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5606 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5607 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5608
5609 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5610
5611 @table @code
5612 @item Insert white space
5613 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5614 solution. eg:
5615
5616 @example
5617 .macro label l
5618 \l :
5619 .endm
5620 @end example
5621
5622 @item Use @samp{\()}
5623 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5624 the following text. eg:
5625
5626 @example
5627 .macro opcode base length
5628 \base\().\length
5629 .endm
5630 @end example
5631
5632 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5633 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5634 used as a separator. eg:
5635
5636 @example
5637 .altmacro
5638 .macro label l
5639 l&:
5640 .endm
5641 @end example
5642 @end table
5643
5644 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5645 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5646 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5647
5648 @item .endm
5649 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5650 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5651
5652 @item .exitm
5653 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5654 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5655
5656 @cindex number of macros executed
5657 @cindex macros, count executed
5658 @item \@@
5659 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5660 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5661 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5662
5663 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5664 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5665 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5666 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5667 @end ftable
5668
5669 @node MRI
5670 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5671
5672 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5673 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5674 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5675 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5676 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5677 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5678
5679 @node Noaltmacro
5680 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5681 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5682
5683 @node Nolist
5684 @section @code{.nolist}
5685
5686 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5687 @cindex listing control, turning off
5688 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5689 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5690 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5691 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5692 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5693
5694 @node Octa
5695 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5696
5697 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5698 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5699 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5700 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5701 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5702 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5703
5704 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5705 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5706
5707 @node Offset
5708 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5709
5710 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5711 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5712 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5713 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5714 directive.
5715
5716 @node Org
5717 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5718
5719 @cindex @code{org} directive
5720 @cindex location counter, advancing
5721 @cindex advancing location counter
5722 @cindex current address, advancing
5723 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5724 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5725 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5726 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5727 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5728 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5729 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5730 is the same as the current subsection.
5731
5732 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5733 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5734 backwards.
5735
5736 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5737 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5738 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5739 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5740 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5741 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5742
5743 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5744 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5745 people's assemblers.
5746
5747 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5748 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5749 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5750 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5751
5752 @node P2align
5753 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5754
5755 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5756 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5757 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5758 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5759 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5760 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5761 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5762 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5763
5764 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5765 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5766 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5767 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5768 with no-op instructions.
5769
5770 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5771 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5772 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5773 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5774 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5775 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5776 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5777
5778 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5779 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5780 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5781 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5782 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5783 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5784 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5785 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5786 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5787 undefined.
5788
5789 @ifset ELF
5790 @node PopSection
5791 @section @code{.popsection}
5792
5793 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5794 @cindex Section Stack
5795 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5796 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5797 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5798 (@pxref{Previous}).
5799
5800 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5801 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5802 stack.
5803 @end ifset
5804
5805 @ifset ELF
5806 @node Previous
5807 @section @code{.previous}
5808
5809 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5810 @cindex Section Stack
5811 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5812 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5813 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5814 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5815
5816 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5817 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5818 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5819 subsections). For example:
5820
5821 @smallexample
5822 .section A
5823 .subsection 1
5824 .word 0x1234
5825 .subsection 2
5826 .word 0x5678
5827 .previous
5828 .word 0x9abc
5829 @end smallexample
5830
5831 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5832 section A. Whilst:
5833
5834 @smallexample
5835 .section A
5836 .subsection 1
5837 # Now in section A subsection 1
5838 .word 0x1234
5839 .section B
5840 .subsection 0
5841 # Now in section B subsection 0
5842 .word 0x5678
5843 .subsection 1
5844 # Now in section B subsection 1
5845 .word 0x9abc
5846 .previous
5847 # Now in section B subsection 0
5848 .word 0xdef0
5849 @end smallexample
5850
5851 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5852 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5853
5854 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5855 the top section on the section stack.
5856 @end ifset
5857
5858 @node Print
5859 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5860
5861 @cindex @code{print} directive
5862 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5863 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5864
5865 @ifset ELF
5866 @node Protected
5867 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5868
5869 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5870 @cindex visibility
5871 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5872 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5873
5874 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5875 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5876 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5877 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5878 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5879 this.
5880 @end ifset
5881
5882 @node Psize
5883 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5884
5885 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5886 @cindex listing control: paper size
5887 @cindex paper size, for listings
5888 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5889 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5890
5891 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5892 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5893 default width is 200 columns.
5894
5895 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5896 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5897 @code{.eject}).
5898
5899 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5900 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5901
5902 @node Purgem
5903 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5904
5905 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5906 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5907 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5908
5909 @ifset ELF
5910 @node PushSection
5911 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5912
5913 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5914 @cindex Section Stack
5915 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5916 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5917 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5918 (@pxref{Previous}).
5919
5920 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5921 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5922 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5923 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5924 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5925 @end ifset
5926
5927 @node Quad
5928 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5929
5930 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5931 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5932 each bignum, it emits
5933 @ifclear bignum-16
5934 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5935 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5936 @cindex eight-byte integer
5937 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5938
5939 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5940 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5941 @end ifclear
5942 @ifset bignum-16
5943 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5944 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5945 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5946 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5947 @end ifset
5948
5949 @node Reloc
5950 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5951
5952 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5953 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5954 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5955 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5956 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5957 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5958 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5959 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5960 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5961 section.
5962
5963 @node Rept
5964 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5965
5966 @cindex @code{rept} directive
5967 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5968 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5969
5970 For example, assembling
5971
5972 @example
5973 .rept 3
5974 .long 0
5975 .endr
5976 @end example
5977
5978 is equivalent to assembling
5979
5980 @example
5981 .long 0
5982 .long 0
5983 .long 0
5984 @end example
5985
5986 @node Sbttl
5987 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5988
5989 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5990 @cindex subtitles for listings
5991 @cindex listing control: subtitle
5992 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5993 title line) when generating assembly listings.
5994
5995 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5996 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5997
5998 @ifset COFF
5999 @node Scl
6000 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6001
6002 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6003 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6004 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6005 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6006 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6007 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6008 symbolic debugging information.
6009 @ifset BOUT
6010
6011 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6012 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6013 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6014 @end ifset
6015 @end ifset
6016
6017 @ifset COFF-ELF
6018 @node Section
6019 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6020
6021 @cindex named section
6022 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6023 named @var{name}.
6024
6025 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6026 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6027 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6028
6029 @ifset COFF
6030 @ifset ELF
6031 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6032 @subheading COFF Version
6033 @end ifset
6034
6035 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6036 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6037 ways:
6038
6039 @smallexample
6040 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6041 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6042 @end smallexample
6043
6044 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6045 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6046 @table @code
6047 @item b
6048 bss section (uninitialized data)
6049 @item n
6050 section is not loaded
6051 @item w
6052 writable section
6053 @item d
6054 data section
6055 @item e
6056 exclude section from linking
6057 @item r
6058 read-only section
6059 @item x
6060 executable section
6061 @item s
6062 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6063 @item a
6064 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6065 @item y
6066 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6067 @item 0-9
6068 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6069 @end table
6070
6071 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6072 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6073 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6074 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6075 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6076
6077 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6078 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6079 @end ifset
6080
6081 @ifset ELF
6082 @ifset COFF
6083 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6084 @subheading ELF Version
6085 @end ifset
6086
6087 @cindex Section Stack
6088 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6089 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6090 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6091 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6092
6093 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6094 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6095
6096 @smallexample
6097 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6098 @end smallexample
6099
6100 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6101 combination of the following characters:
6102 @table @code
6103 @item a
6104 section is allocatable
6105 @item e
6106 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6107 @item w
6108 section is writable
6109 @item x
6110 section is executable
6111 @item M
6112 section is mergeable
6113 @item S
6114 section contains zero terminated strings
6115 @item G
6116 section is a member of a section group
6117 @item T
6118 section is used for thread-local-storage
6119 @item ?
6120 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6121 @end table
6122
6123 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6124 @table @code
6125 @item @@progbits
6126 section contains data
6127 @item @@nobits
6128 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6129 @item @@note
6130 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6131 @item @@init_array
6132 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6133 @item @@fini_array
6134 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6135 @item @@preinit_array
6136 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6137 @end table
6138
6139 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6140
6141 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6142 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6143 @code{%} character.
6144
6145 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6146 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6147
6148 @smallexample
6149 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6150 @end smallexample
6151
6152 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6153 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6154 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6155 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6156 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6157 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6158 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6159 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6160 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6161
6162 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6163 be present along with an additional field like this:
6164
6165 @smallexample
6166 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6167 @end smallexample
6168
6169 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6170 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6171 @table @code
6172 @item comdat
6173 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6174 @item .gnu.linkonce
6175 an alias for comdat
6176 @end table
6177
6178 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6179 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6180
6181 @smallexample
6182 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6183 @end smallexample
6184
6185 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6186 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6187 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6188 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6189 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6190 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6191
6192 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6193 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6194 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6195 executable. The section will contain data.
6196
6197 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6198 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6199
6200 @smallexample
6201 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6202 @end smallexample
6203
6204 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6205 separated flags:
6206 @table @code
6207 @item #alloc
6208 section is allocatable
6209 @item #write
6210 section is writable
6211 @item #execinstr
6212 section is executable
6213 @item #exclude
6214 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6215 @item #tls
6216 section is used for thread local storage
6217 @end table
6218
6219 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6220 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6221 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6222 work.
6223 @end ifset
6224 @end ifset
6225
6226 @node Set
6227 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6228
6229 @cindex @code{set} directive
6230 @cindex symbol value, setting
6231 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6232 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6233 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6234 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6235
6236 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6237
6238 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6239 file is the last value stored into it.
6240
6241 @ifset Z80
6242 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6243 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6244 @end ifset
6245
6246 @node Short
6247 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6248
6249 @cindex @code{short} directive
6250 @ifset GENERIC
6251 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6252 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6253
6254 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6255 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6256 @end ifset
6257 @ifclear GENERIC
6258 @ifset W16
6259 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6260 @end ifset
6261 @ifset W32
6262 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6263 a 16 bit number for each.
6264 @end ifset
6265 @end ifclear
6266
6267 @node Single
6268 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6269
6270 @cindex @code{single} directive
6271 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6272 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6273 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6274 @ifset GENERIC
6275 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6276 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6277 @end ifset
6278 @ifclear GENERIC
6279 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6280 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6281 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6282 @end ifset
6283 @end ifclear
6284
6285 @ifset COFF-ELF
6286 @node Size
6287 @section @code{.size}
6288
6289 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6290
6291 @ifset COFF
6292 @ifset ELF
6293 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6294 @subheading COFF Version
6295 @end ifset
6296
6297 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6298 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6299 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6300
6301 @smallexample
6302 .size @var{expression}
6303 @end smallexample
6304
6305 @ifset BOUT
6306 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6307 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6308 ignores it.
6309 @end ifset
6310 @end ifset
6311
6312 @ifset ELF
6313 @ifset COFF
6314 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6315 @subheading ELF Version
6316 @end ifset
6317
6318 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6319 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6320
6321 @smallexample
6322 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6323 @end smallexample
6324
6325 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6326 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6327 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6328 symbols.
6329 @end ifset
6330 @end ifset
6331
6332 @ifclear no-space-dir
6333 @node Skip
6334 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6335
6336 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6337 @cindex filling memory
6338 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6339 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6340 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6341 @samp{.space}.
6342 @end ifclear
6343
6344 @node Sleb128
6345 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6346
6347 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6348 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6349 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6350 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6351
6352 @ifclear no-space-dir
6353 @node Space
6354 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6355
6356 @cindex @code{space} directive
6357 @cindex filling memory
6358 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6359 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6360 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6361 as @samp{.skip}.
6362
6363 @ifset HPPA
6364 @quotation
6365 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6366 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6367 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6368 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6369 for a summary.
6370 @end quotation
6371 @end ifset
6372 @end ifclear
6373
6374 @ifset have-stabs
6375 @node Stab
6376 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6377
6378 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6379 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6380 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6381 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6382 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6383 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6384 Up to five fields are required:
6385
6386 @table @var
6387 @item string
6388 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6389 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6390 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6391 using this field.
6392
6393 @item type
6394 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6395 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6396 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6397
6398 @item other
6399 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6400 low 8 bits of this expression.
6401
6402 @item desc
6403 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6404 bits of this expression.
6405
6406 @item value
6407 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6408 @end table
6409
6410 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6411 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6412 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6413 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6414
6415 @table @code
6416 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6417 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6418
6419 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6420 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6421 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6422 strings.
6423
6424 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6425 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6426 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6427 assembled.
6428
6429 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6430 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6431 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6432
6433 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6434 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6435 All five fields are specified.
6436 @end table
6437 @end ifset
6438 @c end have-stabs
6439
6440 @node String
6441 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6442 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6443
6444 @cindex string, copying to object file
6445 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6446 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6447 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6448 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6449 @cindex @code{string} directive
6450 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6451 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6452 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6453 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6454
6455 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6456 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6457 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6458 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6459
6460 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6461 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6462 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6463 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6464
6465 Example:
6466 @smallexample
6467 .string32 "BYE"
6468 expands to:
6469 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6470 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6471 @end smallexample
6472
6473
6474 @node Struct
6475 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6476
6477 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6478 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6479 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6480 @smallexample
6481 .struct 0
6482 field1:
6483 .struct field1 + 4
6484 field2:
6485 .struct field2 + 4
6486 field3:
6487 @end smallexample
6488 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6489 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6490 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6491 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6492 before further assembly.
6493
6494 @ifset ELF
6495 @node SubSection
6496 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6497
6498 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6499 @cindex Section Stack
6500 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6501 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6502 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6503 (@pxref{Previous}).
6504
6505 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6506 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6507 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6508 @end ifset
6509
6510 @ifset ELF
6511 @node Symver
6512 @section @code{.symver}
6513 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6514 @cindex symbol versioning
6515 @cindex versions of symbols
6516 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6517 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6518 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6519 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6520 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6521 shared library.
6522
6523 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6524 @smallexample
6525 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6526 @end smallexample
6527 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6528 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6529 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6530 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6531 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6532 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6533 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6534 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6535 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6536 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6537 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6538 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6539 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6540 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6541
6542 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6543 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6544 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6545 symbol table.
6546
6547 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6548 @smallexample
6549 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6550 @end smallexample
6551 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6552 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6553 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6554 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6555
6556 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6557 @smallexample
6558 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6559 @end smallexample
6560 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6561 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6562 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6563 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6564 @end ifset
6565
6566 @ifset COFF
6567 @node Tag
6568 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6569
6570 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6571 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6572 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6573 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6574 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6575 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6576 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6577 @ifset BOUT
6578
6579 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6580 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6581 ignores it.
6582 @end ifset
6583 @end ifset
6584
6585 @node Text
6586 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6587
6588 @cindex @code{text} directive
6589 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6590 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6591 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6592 is used.
6593
6594 @node Title
6595 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6596
6597 @cindex @code{title} directive
6598 @cindex listing control: title line
6599 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6600 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6601
6602 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6603 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6604
6605 @ifset COFF-ELF
6606 @node Type
6607 @section @code{.type}
6608
6609 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6610
6611 @ifset COFF
6612 @ifset ELF
6613 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6614 @subheading COFF Version
6615 @end ifset
6616
6617 @cindex COFF symbol type
6618 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6619 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6620 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6621 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6622
6623 @smallexample
6624 .type @var{int}
6625 @end smallexample
6626
6627 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6628 entry.
6629
6630 @ifset BOUT
6631 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6632 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6633 directive but ignores it.
6634 @end ifset
6635 @end ifset
6636
6637 @ifset ELF
6638 @ifset COFF
6639 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6640 @subheading ELF Version
6641 @end ifset
6642
6643 @cindex ELF symbol type
6644 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6645 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6646 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6647
6648 @smallexample
6649 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6650 @end smallexample
6651
6652 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6653 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6654 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6655 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6656
6657 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6658 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6659 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6660 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6661 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6662 assemblers.
6663
6664 The syntaxes supported are:
6665
6666 @smallexample
6667 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6668 .type <name>,#<type>
6669 .type <name>,@@<type>
6670 .type <name>,%<type>
6671 .type <name>,"<type>"
6672 @end smallexample
6673
6674 The types supported are:
6675
6676 @table @gcctabopt
6677 @item STT_FUNC
6678 @itemx function
6679 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6680
6681 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6682 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6683 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6684 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6685
6686 @item STT_OBJECT
6687 @itemx object
6688 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6689
6690 @item STT_TLS
6691 @itemx tls_object
6692 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6693
6694 @item STT_COMMON
6695 @itemx common
6696 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6697
6698 @item STT_NOTYPE
6699 @itemx notype
6700 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6701
6702 @item gnu_unique_object
6703 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6704 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6705 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6706 systems).
6707
6708 @end table
6709
6710 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6711
6712 @end ifset
6713 @end ifset
6714
6715 @node Uleb128
6716 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6717
6718 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6719 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6720 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6721 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6722
6723 @ifset COFF
6724 @node Val
6725 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6726
6727 @cindex @code{val} directive
6728 @cindex COFF value attribute
6729 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6730 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6731 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6732 entry.
6733 @ifset BOUT
6734
6735 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6736 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6737 @end ifset
6738 @end ifset
6739
6740 @ifset ELF
6741 @node Version
6742 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6743
6744 @cindex @code{version} directive
6745 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6746 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6747 @end ifset
6748
6749 @ifset ELF
6750 @node VTableEntry
6751 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6752
6753 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6754 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6755 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6756
6757 @node VTableInherit
6758 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6759
6760 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6761 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6762 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6763 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6764 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6765 @end ifset
6766
6767 @node Warning
6768 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6769 @cindex warning directive
6770 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6771 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6772
6773 @node Weak
6774 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6775
6776 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6777 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6778 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6779
6780 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6781 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6782 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6783
6784 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6785 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6786 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6787
6788 @node Weakref
6789 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6790
6791 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6792 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6793 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6794 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6795 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6796 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6797
6798 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6799 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6800 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6801 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6802 had the references to the alias removed.
6803
6804 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6805 within the assembler.
6806
6807 @node Word
6808 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6809
6810 @cindex @code{word} directive
6811 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6812 separated by commas.
6813 @ifclear GENERIC
6814 @ifset W32
6815 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6816 @end ifset
6817 @ifset W16
6818 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6819 @end ifset
6820 @end ifclear
6821 @ifset GENERIC
6822
6823 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6824 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6825 @end ifset
6826
6827 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6828 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6829 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6830 @cindex difference tables altered
6831 @cindex altered difference tables
6832 @quotation
6833 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6834 @end quotation
6835
6836 @ifset GENERIC
6837 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6838 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6839 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6840 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6841
6842 @end ifset
6843 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6844 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6845 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6846 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6847 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6848 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6849 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6850 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6851 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6852 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6853 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6854 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6855 @code{sym2}.
6856
6857 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6858 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6859 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6860 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6861 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6862 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6863 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6864
6865 @ifset INTERNALS
6866 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6867 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6868 assembly language programmers.
6869 @end ifset
6870 @end ifset
6871 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6872
6873 @node Deprecated
6874 @section Deprecated Directives
6875
6876 @cindex deprecated directives
6877 @cindex obsolescent directives
6878 One day these directives won't work.
6879 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6880 @table @t
6881 @item .abort
6882 @item .line
6883 @end table
6884
6885 @ifset ELF
6886 @node Object Attributes
6887 @chapter Object Attributes
6888 @cindex object attributes
6889
6890 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6891 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6892 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6893 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6894 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6895 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6896 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6897 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6898 newer generation at run-time.
6899
6900 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6901 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6902 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6903 correctly.
6904
6905 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6906 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6907 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6908 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6909 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6910 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6911
6912 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6913 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6914
6915 @menu
6916 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6917 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6918 @end menu
6919
6920 @node GNU Object Attributes
6921 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6922
6923 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6924 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6925
6926 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6927 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6928 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6929 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6930 architecture-dependent ones.
6931
6932 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6933
6934 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6935
6936 @table @r
6937 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6938 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6939 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6940 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6941 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6942 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6943 @end table
6944
6945 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6946
6947 @table @r
6948 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6949 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6950
6951 @itemize @bullet
6952 @item
6953 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6954 @item
6955 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6956 FPU.
6957 @item
6958 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6959 @item
6960 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6961 @item
6962 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6963 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6964 purpose registers.
6965 @end itemize
6966 @end table
6967
6968 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
6969
6970 @table @r
6971 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6972 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6973
6974 @itemize @bullet
6975 @item
6976 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6977 @item
6978 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6979 @item
6980 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6981 @item
6982 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6983 @end itemize
6984
6985 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6986 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6987
6988 @itemize @bullet
6989 @item
6990 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
6991 @item
6992 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6993 @item
6994 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6995 @item
6996 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6997 @end itemize
6998 @end table
6999
7000 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7001 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7002
7003 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7004 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7005 mailing list.
7006
7007 @itemize @bullet
7008 @item
7009 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7010 @item
7011 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7012 @item
7013 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7014 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7015 @item
7016 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7017 @item
7018 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7019 @item
7020 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7021 @end itemize
7022
7023 @end ifset
7024
7025 @ifset GENERIC
7026 @node Machine Dependencies
7027 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7028
7029 @cindex machine dependencies
7030 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7031 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7032 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7033 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7034 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7035 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7036 optimization.
7037
7038 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7039 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7040 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7041
7042 @menu
7043 @ifset AARCH64
7044 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7045 @end ifset
7046 @ifset ALPHA
7047 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7048 @end ifset
7049 @ifset ARC
7050 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7051 @end ifset
7052 @ifset ARM
7053 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7054 @end ifset
7055 @ifset AVR
7056 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7057 @end ifset
7058 @ifset Blackfin
7059 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7060 @end ifset
7061 @ifset CR16
7062 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7063 @end ifset
7064 @ifset CRIS
7065 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7066 @end ifset
7067 @ifset D10V
7068 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7069 @end ifset
7070 @ifset D30V
7071 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7072 @end ifset
7073 @ifset EPIPHANY
7074 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7075 @end ifset
7076 @ifset H8/300
7077 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7078 @end ifset
7079 @ifset HPPA
7080 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7081 @end ifset
7082 @ifset I370
7083 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7084 @end ifset
7085 @ifset I80386
7086 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7087 @end ifset
7088 @ifset I860
7089 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7090 @end ifset
7091 @ifset I960
7092 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7093 @end ifset
7094 @ifset IA64
7095 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7096 @end ifset
7097 @ifset IP2K
7098 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7099 @end ifset
7100 @ifset LM32
7101 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7102 @end ifset
7103 @ifset M32C
7104 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7105 @end ifset
7106 @ifset M32R
7107 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7108 @end ifset
7109 @ifset M680X0
7110 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7111 @end ifset
7112 @ifset M68HC11
7113 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7114 @end ifset
7115 @ifset METAG
7116 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7117 @end ifset
7118 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7119 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7120 @end ifset
7121 @ifset MIPS
7122 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7123 @end ifset
7124 @ifset MMIX
7125 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7126 @end ifset
7127 @ifset MSP430
7128 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7129 @end ifset
7130 @ifset NIOSII
7131 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7132 @end ifset
7133 @ifset NS32K
7134 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7135 @end ifset
7136 @ifset SH
7137 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7138 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7139 @end ifset
7140 @ifset PDP11
7141 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7142 @end ifset
7143 @ifset PJ
7144 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7145 @end ifset
7146 @ifset PPC
7147 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7148 @end ifset
7149 @ifset RL78
7150 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7151 @end ifset
7152 @ifset RX
7153 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7154 @end ifset
7155 @ifset S390
7156 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7157 @end ifset
7158 @ifset SCORE
7159 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7160 @end ifset
7161 @ifset SPARC
7162 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7163 @end ifset
7164 @ifset TIC54X
7165 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7166 @end ifset
7167 @ifset TIC6X
7168 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7169 @end ifset
7170 @ifset TILEGX
7171 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7172 @end ifset
7173 @ifset TILEPRO
7174 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7175 @end ifset
7176 @ifset V850
7177 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7178 @end ifset
7179 @ifset XGATE
7180 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7181 @end ifset
7182 @ifset XSTORMY16
7183 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7184 @end ifset
7185 @ifset XTENSA
7186 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7187 @end ifset
7188 @ifset Z80
7189 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7190 @end ifset
7191 @ifset Z8000
7192 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7193 @end ifset
7194 @ifset VAX
7195 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7196 @end ifset
7197 @end menu
7198
7199 @lowersections
7200 @end ifset
7201
7202 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7203 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7204 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7205 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7206 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7207 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7208 @c in both conditional blocks.
7209
7210 @ifset AARCH64
7211 @include c-aarch64.texi
7212 @end ifset
7213
7214 @ifset ALPHA
7215 @include c-alpha.texi
7216 @end ifset
7217
7218 @ifset ARC
7219 @include c-arc.texi
7220 @end ifset
7221
7222 @ifset ARM
7223 @include c-arm.texi
7224 @end ifset
7225
7226 @ifset AVR
7227 @include c-avr.texi
7228 @end ifset
7229
7230 @ifset Blackfin
7231 @include c-bfin.texi
7232 @end ifset
7233
7234 @ifset CR16
7235 @include c-cr16.texi
7236 @end ifset
7237
7238 @ifset CRIS
7239 @include c-cris.texi
7240 @end ifset
7241
7242 @ifset Renesas-all
7243 @ifclear GENERIC
7244 @node Machine Dependencies
7245 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7246
7247 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7248 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7249 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7250 family.
7251
7252 @menu
7253 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7254 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7255 @end menu
7256 @lowersections
7257 @end ifclear
7258 @end ifset
7259
7260 @ifset D10V
7261 @include c-d10v.texi
7262 @end ifset
7263
7264 @ifset D30V
7265 @include c-d30v.texi
7266 @end ifset
7267
7268 @ifset EPIPHANY
7269 @include c-epiphany.texi
7270 @end ifset
7271
7272 @ifset H8/300
7273 @include c-h8300.texi
7274 @end ifset
7275
7276 @ifset HPPA
7277 @include c-hppa.texi
7278 @end ifset
7279
7280 @ifset I370
7281 @include c-i370.texi
7282 @end ifset
7283
7284 @ifset I80386
7285 @include c-i386.texi
7286 @end ifset
7287
7288 @ifset I860
7289 @include c-i860.texi
7290 @end ifset
7291
7292 @ifset I960
7293 @include c-i960.texi
7294 @end ifset
7295
7296 @ifset IA64
7297 @include c-ia64.texi
7298 @end ifset
7299
7300 @ifset IP2K
7301 @include c-ip2k.texi
7302 @end ifset
7303
7304 @ifset LM32
7305 @include c-lm32.texi
7306 @end ifset
7307
7308 @ifset M32C
7309 @include c-m32c.texi
7310 @end ifset
7311
7312 @ifset M32R
7313 @include c-m32r.texi
7314 @end ifset
7315
7316 @ifset M680X0
7317 @include c-m68k.texi
7318 @end ifset
7319
7320 @ifset M68HC11
7321 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7322 @end ifset
7323
7324 @ifset METAG
7325 @include c-metag.texi
7326 @end ifset
7327
7328 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7329 @include c-microblaze.texi
7330 @end ifset
7331
7332 @ifset MIPS
7333 @include c-mips.texi
7334 @end ifset
7335
7336 @ifset MMIX
7337 @include c-mmix.texi
7338 @end ifset
7339
7340 @ifset MSP430
7341 @include c-msp430.texi
7342 @end ifset
7343
7344 @ifset NIOSII
7345 @include c-nios2.texi
7346 @end ifset
7347
7348 @ifset NS32K
7349 @include c-ns32k.texi
7350 @end ifset
7351
7352 @ifset PDP11
7353 @include c-pdp11.texi
7354 @end ifset
7355
7356 @ifset PJ
7357 @include c-pj.texi
7358 @end ifset
7359
7360 @ifset PPC
7361 @include c-ppc.texi
7362 @end ifset
7363
7364 @ifset RL78
7365 @include c-rl78.texi
7366 @end ifset
7367
7368 @ifset RX
7369 @include c-rx.texi
7370 @end ifset
7371
7372 @ifset S390
7373 @include c-s390.texi
7374 @end ifset
7375
7376 @ifset SCORE
7377 @include c-score.texi
7378 @end ifset
7379
7380 @ifset SH
7381 @include c-sh.texi
7382 @include c-sh64.texi
7383 @end ifset
7384
7385 @ifset SPARC
7386 @include c-sparc.texi
7387 @end ifset
7388
7389 @ifset TIC54X
7390 @include c-tic54x.texi
7391 @end ifset
7392
7393 @ifset TIC6X
7394 @include c-tic6x.texi
7395 @end ifset
7396
7397 @ifset TILEGX
7398 @include c-tilegx.texi
7399 @end ifset
7400
7401 @ifset TILEPRO
7402 @include c-tilepro.texi
7403 @end ifset
7404
7405 @ifset Z80
7406 @include c-z80.texi
7407 @end ifset
7408
7409 @ifset Z8000
7410 @include c-z8k.texi
7411 @end ifset
7412
7413 @ifset VAX
7414 @include c-vax.texi
7415 @end ifset
7416
7417 @ifset V850
7418 @include c-v850.texi
7419 @end ifset
7420
7421 @ifset XGATE
7422 @include c-xgate.texi
7423 @end ifset
7424
7425 @ifset XSTORMY16
7426 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7427 @end ifset
7428
7429 @ifset XTENSA
7430 @include c-xtensa.texi
7431 @end ifset
7432
7433 @ifset GENERIC
7434 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7435 @raisesections
7436 @end ifset
7437
7438 @node Reporting Bugs
7439 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7440 @cindex bugs in assembler
7441 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7442
7443 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7444
7445 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7446 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7447 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7448 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7449
7450 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7451 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7452
7453 @menu
7454 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7455 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7456 @end menu
7457
7458 @node Bug Criteria
7459 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7460 @cindex bug criteria
7461
7462 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7463
7464 @itemize @bullet
7465 @cindex fatal signal
7466 @cindex assembler crash
7467 @cindex crash of assembler
7468 @item
7469 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7470 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7471
7472 @cindex error on valid input
7473 @item
7474 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7475
7476 @cindex invalid input
7477 @item
7478 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7479 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7480 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7481
7482 @item
7483 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7484 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7485 @end itemize
7486
7487 @node Bug Reporting
7488 @section How to Report Bugs
7489 @cindex bug reports
7490 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7491
7492 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7493 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7494 contact that organization first.
7495
7496 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7497 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7498 distribution.
7499
7500 @ifset BUGURL
7501 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7502 to @value{BUGURL}.
7503 @end ifset
7504
7505 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7506 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7507 fact or leave it out, state it!
7508
7509 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7510 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7511 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7512 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7513 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7514 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7515 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7516 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7517 and the most helpful.
7518
7519 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7520 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7521 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7522
7523 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7524 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7525 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7526 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7527
7528 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7529
7530 @itemize @bullet
7531 @item
7532 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7533 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7534
7535 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7536 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7537
7538 @item
7539 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7540
7541 @item
7542 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7543 version number.
7544
7545 @item
7546 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7547 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7548
7549 @item
7550 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7551 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7552 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7553
7554 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7555 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7556
7557 @item
7558 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7559 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7560 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7561 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7562 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7563 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7564 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7565
7566 @item
7567 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7568 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7569
7570 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7571 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7572 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7573 make a mistake.
7574
7575 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7576 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7577 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7578 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7579 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7580 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7581 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7582 observations.
7583
7584 @item
7585 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7586 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7587 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7588 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7589 by line number.
7590
7591 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7592 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7593 @end itemize
7594
7595 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7596
7597 @itemize @bullet
7598 @item
7599 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7600
7601 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7602 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7603 changes will not affect it.
7604
7605 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7606 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7607 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7608 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7609
7610 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7611 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7612 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7613 less time, and so on.
7614
7615 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7616 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7617
7618 @item
7619 A patch for the bug.
7620
7621 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7622 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7623 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7624 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7625
7626 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7627 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7628 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7629 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7630
7631 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7632 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7633 help us to understand.
7634
7635 @item
7636 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7637
7638 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7639 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7640 @end itemize
7641
7642 @node Acknowledgements
7643 @chapter Acknowledgements
7644
7645 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7646 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7647 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7648 @c (October 2012),
7649 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7650
7651 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7652 more details?}
7653
7654 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7655 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7656 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7657
7658 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7659 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7660 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7661 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7662 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7663 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7664 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7665 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7666 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7667 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7668
7669 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7670 in format-specific I/O modules.
7671
7672 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7673 has done much work with it since.
7674
7675 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7676
7677 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7678
7679 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7680 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7681
7682 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7683 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7684 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7685 support a.out format.
7686
7687 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7688 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7689 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7690 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7691 targets.
7692
7693 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7694 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7695 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7696 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7697 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7698 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7699 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7700
7701 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7702 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7703 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7704 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7705
7706 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7707
7708 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7709
7710 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7711 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7712 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7713 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7714
7715 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7716 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7717 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7718 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7719 and some initial 64-bit support).
7720
7721 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7722
7723 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7724 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7725
7726 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7727 flavors.
7728
7729 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7730 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7731
7732 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7733 configuration enhancements.
7734
7735 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7736
7737 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7738 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7739 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7740 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7741
7742 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7743 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7744 @include fdl.texi
7745
7746 @node AS Index
7747 @unnumbered AS Index
7748
7749 @printindex cp
7750
7751 @bye
7752 @c Local Variables:
7753 @c fill-column: 79
7754 @c End:
This page took 0.198524 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.